JP2023014258A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that suppresses a decrease in game interest.SOLUTION: A game machine includes game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) that can make an advantageous game state advantageous to a player, and performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) that can execute a performance. The performance execution means may execute a specific performance (special mode performance) suggesting the possibility that the advantageous game state is made, and can execute multiple types of unit performances N times (3 times) continuously in a specific performance. There is a higher possibility that the advantageous game state is made when the same type of unit performance is executed N times than when the same type of unit performance is executed N-1 times.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 70

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball entering a start hole is satisfied, a variable display of special symbols is executed. After the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the stop display of the special symbols is performed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stopped and displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (see Patent Document 1).

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 may execute a specific effect suggesting that there is a possibility of an advantageous game state, and in the specific effect, a plurality of unit effects are continuously executed.

JP 2019-181255 A

However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve game interest in gaming machines capable of executing a specific effect in which a plurality of unit effects are continuously executed.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a game execution means that may bring the game into an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player;
and a production execution means capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
A specific effect may be executed that suggests that the advantageous gaming state may occur,
In the first specific performance, a plurality of types of unit performance can be continuously executed N times, and the case where the same type of unit performance is executed N-1 times is better than the case where the unit performance is executed N-1 times. It is characterized by a high possibility of becoming an advantageous game state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view for explaining the standby state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view for explaining the moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view for explaining the rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of display devices. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the effect control board side. (A) is a table showing normal figure-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special figure-related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal pattern variation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of a ready-to-win determination table. It is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a structure of the 1st look-ahead determination table. It is a structural example of a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probability variation, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening production, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round production, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending production. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production design, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production design display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation effect of no reach loss. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure fluctuation production until reaching reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. FIG. 24 is a continuation of FIG. 23, showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 26 is a continuation of FIG. 25 showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 26 is a continuation of FIG. 26, showing an example of SP reach. It is a figure showing an example of movable body production|presentation. It is a figure showing an example of operation production. It is a figure showing an example of a pending|holding production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of pending change notice; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of pending change notice; It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing; FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram representing a continuation of FIG. 35 ; 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing. It is a flow chart of special design variation processing. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flow chart of production control main processing. 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; FIG. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46 ; It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining execution timings of various director effects and execution timings of precursor effects; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the foreshadowing effect; It is explanatory drawing showing the specific example of 1st specific production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a second specific effect; It is explanatory drawing showing the specific example of 3rd specific production|presentation (L). It is explanatory drawing showing the specific example of 3rd specific production|presentation (SP). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SPSP reach (L); It is explanatory drawing showing the specific example of SPSP reach (SP). It is a figure showing the structural example of a specific production|presentation determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first sign execution timing determination table when the director effect is executed twice in the special figure fluctuation effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first sign execution timing determination table when the director effect is one in the special figure fluctuation effect. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first precursor execution timing determination table when the first precursor execution timing determination table is executed twice; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a portent effect determination table; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second precursor execution timing determination table; (A) is a normal mode decoration image, a reserved display area, and an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the display area, and (B) is a normal mode decoration image, a reserved display area, and the display area in detail. It is an explanatory diagram showing. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a decoration image, a reserved display area, and an outline of the display area in a first movement mode, and (B) is a decoration image, a reserved display area, and the display in the first movement mode; It is an explanatory view showing a field in detail. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a decoration image, a reserved display area, and an outline of the display area in a second movement mode, and (B) is a decoration image, a reserved display area, and the display in the second movement mode; It is an explanatory view showing a field in detail. It is a figure showing the structural example of a holding|maintenance position movement preliminary announcement determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a pending change notice determination table; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a pending change notice determination table; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a pending change notice determination table; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a pending change timing determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a hold position movement notice and a hold change notice; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a hold position movement notice and a hold change notice; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a hold position movement notice and a hold change notice; It is the production|presentation flow which concerns on a special mode production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a special mode effect execution determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a chance-up scenario determination table. It is a figure showing the structural example of a chance up classification pattern determination table. It is a figure showing the structural example of a chance up classification pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a comprehensive effect mode determination table; It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of a special mode production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of a special mode production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of a special mode production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of a special mode production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of a special mode production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of a special mode production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of a special mode production|presentation. It is a top view of an upper plate. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the production|presentation control board in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a non-game custom operation; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a non-game custom operation; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a non-game custom operation; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a non-game custom operation; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a custom operation during a game; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a custom operation during a game; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a custom operation during a game; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a custom operation during a game; It is a front view of a game board according to a fifth embodiment. It is an explanatory view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side according to the fifth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the production|presentation control board which concerns on 5th Embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table according to the fifth embodiment, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table according to the fifth embodiment, and (C) is a configuration example of the fifth embodiment. It is a configuration example of a small hit symbol type determination table. It is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table according to the fifth embodiment. It is a configuration example of a small winning game control table according to the fifth embodiment. It is a time chart showing the flow of the small winning game. Represents the relationship between the special symbol type (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game, the game state that shifts with the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type, and the end condition related to the game state. It is a figure showing the structural example of a game state setting table. It is a figure showing the structural example of the time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of time production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of time production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of time production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of time production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of time production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of time production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of time production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the example of time production|presentation.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characterizing portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each figure referred to, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions of the same parts are omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplification of description, by describing symbols or codes that refer to information, signals, physical quantities or members, etc., the names of the information, signals, physical quantities or members, etc. corresponding to the symbols or codes will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine The pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY refer to the left, right, up and down directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY. In addition, "forward" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY to the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY, and "backward" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY to the pachinko gaming machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1 and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU. The game machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to the game parlor, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame 22 rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. a door 23;

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer peripheral shape when viewed from the front. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21 .

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22 . The front door 23 includes a frame-like front frame 23m in which a substantially vertically long rectangular large opening is formed approximately in the center, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU faces the transparent plate 23t. The transparent plate 23t is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate in a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in the game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient that the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine PY through the transparent plate 23t.

A rotatable handle 72k for shooting game balls is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount (rotational angle) by which the handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude of the force (shooting strength) applied to the game ball to shoot the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k.

An upper plate 34 protruding forward greatly and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided at the lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. A first production button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided in the center of the front side of the upper plate 34. - 特許庁An operation portion of the first effect button 41k protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is formed into a hemispherical shape. Further, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34. As shown in FIG. Further, the upper surface of the lower plate 35 is provided with a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing surplus game balls that cannot be stored in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Further, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 projecting forward are provided on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the front transparent plate 23t of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, face downward and extend in a predetermined horizontal direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. In addition, a second production button 42k that can be pressed downward is provided at the bottom of the right decorative body 32. As shown in FIG. The operating portion of the second effect button 42k is shaped like a bar. Furthermore, frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34 .

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board performance unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. - 特許庁First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A generally circular opening 1A is formed in the approximate center of the game board 1 when viewed from the front.

A substantially ring-shaped center decoration 61 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 so as to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, outside the center decoration 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration 61 and an outer rail 62 between the left portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration 61 are provided. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61 are formed.

A game area 6 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 by a center decoration 61, an outer rail 62, an inner rail 63, and the like. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration 61, the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63. As shown in FIG. A region surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launching region 7 through which the launched game ball can travel toward the playing region 6 .

The game area 6 is an area in which a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game in the pachinko game machine PY. The game area 6 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown). The game nail is suitable for the game ball entering the game area 6 and flowing down the game area 6 to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that guides to

A general winning device 10</b>D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6 . The general prize winning device 10D is formed with a general prize winning port 10 that allows game balls to enter. When game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decorative body 61 in the game area 6. As shown in FIG. The first start winning device 11D is formed so that a game ball can enter the first start opening 11. - 特許庁The first starting prize winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchangeable) without changing the ease with which a game ball can enter. When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the first starting hole 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

A warp portion 61w is formed from the left side of the center decorative body 61 to the lower end thereof, through which a game ball is passed. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decoration 61. As shown in FIG. The game ball entering the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp portion 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61. As shown in FIG. At the tip of the stage 61s, a downward guiding portion 61y for guiding the game ball downward is provided. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below the downward guiding portion 61y.

Immediately below the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed state and an open state by an electric-tube opening/closing member 12k provided in the electric-tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric tube opening/closing member 12k.

The electric tube opening/closing member 12k is formed of a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from a retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the game area 6.例文帳に追加When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes vertically to the game area 6, and the second start opening 12 is opened so that a ball can be entered. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball and guides it to the second starting port 12 from the horizontal portion.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electronic chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

A gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61 . The gate 13 is configured to allow passage of game balls. Even if the game balls pass through the gate 13, the prize balls are not paid out. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

A big winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the game area 6 and downstream of the gate 13 . The big winning device 14D is formed with a big winning opening 14 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed state and an open state by an AT opening/closing member 14k provided in the big prize winning device 14D. That is, the big winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a substantially oblong rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big winning opening 14. As shown in FIG. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that the upper end of the AT opening/closing member 14k falls forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k protrudes perpendicularly to the game area 6, and the big winning opening 14 is opened so that a ball can be entered.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big winning hole 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (one in the basic embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the big winning hole 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, below the big winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed obliquely downward to the left, and a guide path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second start port 12 is formed in the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the A game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12 , but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11 .

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 11, the second start hole 12, the big prize hole 14, and the general prize hole 10, and the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 are collectively referred to as the first start hole 11, The second starting gate 12, the big prize gate 14, the general prize gate 10, and the "winning" to the gate 13 are collectively called.

By the way, the game area 6 in which game balls can flow can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right hitting".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is shot left-handed is called a first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is shot right-handed. Such a flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also configured by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to enter the gate 13, the second starting hole 12, or the big winning hole 14 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting to the right.

In addition, at substantially the bottom of the game area 6, there are provided two out holes 19 for discharging game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. there is Also, the number of winning balls to be awarded to each winning hole can be appropriately set.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board effect unit EU is a unitization of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and has a display section 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1 .

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k has a laterally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided in the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55 k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50 . The movable board body 55k is arranged at the initial position, and in the standby state, the lower end portion of the movable board body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downward from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a portion of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player in the standby state, and the majority thereof is invisible (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the board movable body 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and can be raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the board movable body 55k is positioned substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined working position can be appropriately set, and whether the board movable body 55k is positioned above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A in a front view. good.

In addition, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in front view about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). The rotary motion of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the plate movable body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, when it is held at the operating position, and when it moves from the operating position to the standby position.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the display devices 8 arranged to the right of the vertical center of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (parts other than the game area 6) will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display device 8 includes a special symbol 1 indicator 81a that variably displays the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1"), a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2 ) is variably displayed, and a normal pattern display 82 that variably displays a normal pattern (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern") is included. In addition, the display device 8 includes a special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a that displays the special figure 1 reservation number described later, and a special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b that displays the special figure 2 reservation number described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is performed. Also, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as "special figure", and the special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as "special figure lottery". Also, the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure indicator 81". Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 83".

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, it is stopped and displayed after the special figure is variably displayed. The stop-displayed special figure (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a big winning game with the opening of the big winning opening 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lights up, ■: lights out) to the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot pattern and represents a jackpot. Also, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the rightmost LED is finally lit up like "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a lost pattern and represents a failure. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be extinguished as a lost pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed over a predetermined variation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The aspect of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, the aspect in which each LED is lit so that the light flows repeatedly from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink all at once unless each LED is stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure may not be performed immediately. Specifically, it is a case where the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or during the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure are suspended based on the winning prize. This suspended special figure lottery and variable display of the special figure are referred to as "special figure reservation".

For the special figure reservation, the special figure 1 lottery reserved based on the winning to the first start opening 11, and the "special figure 1 reservation" representing the variable display of the special figure 1, and the winning to the second start opening 12 There is a special figure 2 lottery reserved based on, and a "special figure 2 reservation" representing a variable display of the special figure 2. And, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a displays the number of special figure 1 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 lottery and special figure 1 variable display. On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 lotteries and the number of special figure 2 variable displays.

It is also possible to set or not set the upper limit to the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations. Also, when providing an upper limit to the number of special figure 1 reservation and the number of special figure 2 reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservation and the number of special figure 2 reservation may be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 pending indicator 83a and the special figure 2 pending indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and by lighting the LEDs by the number of special figure 1 pending and special figure 2 pending Display the number of FIG. 1 pending and special figure 2 pending. In the following, the number of special figure 1 reservations is called "special figure 1 reservation number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 reservations is called "special figure 2 reservation number (U2)". In addition, "special figure 1 reservation number" and "special figure 2 reservation number" are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation number". Furthermore, "special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a" and "special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 83".

In addition, the variable display of the general pattern is executed when the general pattern lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the gate 13 is performed. Then, the variable display of the general pattern informs the result of the general pattern lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, after the normal map is displayed variably, the display is stopped. The stopped normal map (stop normal map) is identification information representing the result of the normal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern, an auxiliary game with opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The normal figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general pattern indicator 82 represents the general pattern corresponding to the result of the general pattern lottery, that is, the result of the general pattern lottery. When the result of the normal drawing lottery is a hit, both LEDs are finally lit like "□□" (□: lighting, ▪: lighting off). This lighting mode is a winning pattern and represents a winning. In addition, when the result of the normal drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED is finally lit like "■□". This lighting mode is a lost pattern and represents a failure. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the normal drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as a lost pattern.

In addition, before the normal map is stop-displayed, the normal map is displayed with fluctuation for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variable display mode of the normal map is a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed stopped (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY, there is a game control board 100 for performing control (progress of the game) related to a game in which a game profit can be obtained. Power is supplied to the performance control board 120 for controlling the performance, the image control board 140 for controlling the image, the payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of the game balls, and each board 100, 120, 140, 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190 . ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches on/off of the power supply. The power supply board 190 is also provided with a RAM clear switch 192 that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 192 is for causing the game CPU 102 to clear (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear") game information stored in the game RAM 104 of the game control microcomputer 101, which will be described later, when power is turned on. . The RAM clear switch 192 is provided on the power board 190 arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY. Therefore, basically, the RAM clear switch 192 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the amusement arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . That is, it can be said that the RAM clear switch 192 is an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. When the RAM clear switch 192 is subjected to a specific operation (for example, the RAM clear switch 192 is pressed for a predetermined time (eg, 5 seconds), or the RAM clear switch 192 is pressed a predetermined number of times (eg, 5 times)), the RAM clear switch 192 A detection signal indicating that is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101 . In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 192 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 192 can be changed as appropriate. It's okay to be there. Moreover, the operation mode of the RAM clear switch 192 for clearing the RAM is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. It should be noted that games that can obtain game profits to be controlled by the game control board 100 include special figure lottery, variable display of special figure, jackpot game, setting of game state to be described later, normal figure lottery, and variable display of general figure. , Auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game memory. A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot pattern type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, an auxiliary A game control table and the like are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the game RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage unit 105 . Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, when there is a prize to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 of the game ball, a special figure reservation can occur, but if a special figure reservation is possible, that is, the number of special figure reservations When the upper limit has not been reached, based on this winning prize, judgment information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special lottery or the like is acquired. And this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as special figure reservation. In the following, the determination information acquired by winning the first starting port 11 of the game ball is referred to as "special figure 1 related determination information", and is acquired by winning the second starting port 12 of the game ball. The determination information that is to be referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information". Also, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit value of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Also, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit value of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100 . In addition, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a large winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10 a detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10 . The first starting hole sensor 11 a detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11 . The second starting hole sensor 12 a detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12 . The gate sensor 13 a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13 . The big winning hole sensor 14 a detects a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14 .

In addition, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

It should be noted that the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Furthermore, the game control board 100 is connected with the display devices 8 (a special figure display device 81, a normal figure display device 82, and a special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The card unit CU and the payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and the ejection device 72 is also connected. The card unit CU is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY, and is a device that enables ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out prize balls and rental balls. The paid-out prize balls and rental balls are detected by a pay-out sensor 73a for counting them.

A shooting device 72 is a device for shooting game balls. A handle 72k is included in the shooting device 72 and constitutes an operating section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact with the handle 72k by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k, and sends a detection signal (contact detection signal) to the payout control board 170 via the firing control circuit 175. Output. That is, the touch switch 72a outputs a contact detection signal to the payout control board 170 (turns ON) when the handle 72k is in contact, and outputs a contact detection signal to the payout control board 170 when the handle 72k is not in contact. not (set to OFF state). Further, the handle 72k is connected to a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k.

The payout control board 170 is capable of controlling the launching device 72, and the launching device 72 is activated under the condition that the contact detection signal from the touch switch 72a is in the ON state, in other words, the handle 72k is in contact with the player. to launch game balls. Therefore, when the contact detection signal is OFF, in other words when the handle 72k is not in contact with the player, the shooting device 72 cannot shoot the game ball. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting motor 72m so that the game ball is shot with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob 72b when the shooting of the game ball is permitted. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

In addition, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the game control board 100 , the effect control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 .

In addition, the connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120 is possible. That is, between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed as communication direction control means (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is mounted with a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The performance control board 120 can be positioned as a performance control section that controls the performance together with the image control board 140, the audio control circuit 161, and the sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the effect control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and uses the effect device (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, and board movable body 55k, etc.) for game effects, customer waiting effects, and operation promotion. It is sufficient if the performance and the like can be controlled.

The effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special figure fluctuation effects, pending effects, jackpot game effects, etc.), customer waiting effects, and operations of the first effect button 41k and the second effect button 42k. It includes an operation prompting effect that prompts an operation during a valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores programs and the like for controlling performance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123. A performance CPU 122 for executing the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores programs for effect control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The effect RAM 124 includes a starting winning command reserve storage unit 125 for storing a starting winning command to be described later, a symbol designation command storage unit 126 for storing a symbol designation command to be described later, and a special figure fluctuation start command to be described later. A variation start command storage unit 127 is provided.

An image control board 140 is connected to the performance control board 120 . The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. to do Incidentally, the connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both transmission of signals from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 for executing the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 storing image data to be displayed on the image display device 50 and a VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144 . All or part of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and moving image data, specifically characters, items, patterns, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on the image display device 50. (including patterns) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the development area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, the developed image data are appropriately synthesized and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146 . Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, the order of priority of display, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, through the voice control circuit 161 from the speaker 52 voice, music, and Outputs sound effects, etc.

Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 . Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured by a substrate and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 to cause the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Also, the performance control board 120 is connected to various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the effect control board 120 . In addition, the effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 41a and a second effect button sensor 42a. The first effect button sensor 41a detects that the first effect button 41k is pressed. The second effect button sensor 42a detects that the second effect button 42k has been pressed. The 1st production|presentation button sensor 41a and the 2nd production|presentation button sensor 42a will output the signal according to the content of the detection to the production|presentation control board 120, if it detects that each was operated.

The type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 include a board movable body rotation motor 55m1 and a board movable body lifting motor 55m2. The disk movable body rotation motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The movable board body lifting motor 55m2 can lift or lower the lifting member 55k2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, hereinafter, the operation of the "rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as the "operation of the movable board 55k". Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the lifting member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the board movable body 55k."

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100 and the like. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. In addition, the data stored in ROM123 for production|presentation of the production|presentation control board 120 is used for preparation of light emission pattern data.

It should be noted that the CPU may be mounted on the sub-drive board 162 formed of a board. In this case, the CPU may be caused to control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like, and control the operation of the board movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

3. Principal Games Performed by Gaming Machine Next, the principal games performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15. FIG.

3-1. Games Related to Universal Figures First, games related to universal charts will be described. The pachinko game machine PY can execute a normal pattern lottery when the launched game ball passes through the gate 13. - 特許庁When the general pattern lottery is performed, the general pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the general pattern (stop display after performing variable display). Here, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the normal map is also called "losing universal map" in order to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern, which will be described later.

When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing normal figure is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Also, in the following, when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not performed, the game ball passing through the gate 13 is referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition".

The pachinko game machine PY performs a series of games such as the variable display of the normal pattern and the auxiliary game based on the establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition, the acquisition of the general pattern related determination information and the general pattern lottery. can be done. As shown in FIG. 8A, normal pattern random numbers are included in the general pattern related determination information to be acquired. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for performing a hit determination. Each random number is appropriately bounded.

3-1-1. Hit Judgment Hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a hit (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) using a hit judgment table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a game state, which will be described later. When associated with the game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (normal symbol random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to hit and lose, which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired normal symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and performs hit determination as to whether it is a hit or a miss. If the result of the hit determination is hit, the hit pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal pattern. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed in variable display of the normal figure. It should be noted that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination/normal pattern variable display Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern using a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table such as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The normal pattern fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined matters related to the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state), the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving There is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (shorter normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used when in the state.

In each normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal pattern to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY can vary the normal figure fluctuation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal figure when stopping the normal figure (losing normal figure), the normal figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. For the variable display of the normal pattern in the case of stop display, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined. In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern when the losing normal pattern is stopped is determined to be a normal pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5 seconds, and the normal pattern when the winning pattern is stopped and displayed. For the variable display of , it is determined to be a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5 seconds. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change these normal pattern fluctuation times.

Then, the variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is performed by the normal pattern display device 82 . In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, the normal pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the normal pattern.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of the general pattern, and as a display result (the result of the general pattern lottery), it is executed when the winning design is stopped and displayed (derived). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is opened

Elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko game machine PY controls an auxiliary game using an auxiliary game control table. Auxiliary game components are stored in the auxiliary game control table. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). It should be noted that the specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can vary the opening time of the electric chew 12D between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time during which it is difficult to win the game balls such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, it is longer than the first opening time, such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closed) of 1.0 seconds, and the game ball wins the electric chew 12D. The electric tube 12D is opened only for a second opening time that is easy to set.

In addition, below, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also called "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in that auxiliary game. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko game machine PY can execute the special figure 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 variable display (stopped display after performing the variable display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 81a to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 1 includes a big winning pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 1 lottery include a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. Further, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the game based on the winning is terminated without the big winning game being played.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second start hole 12.例文帳に追加When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 variable display (stop display after performing the variable display) is performed in the special figure 2 display device 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 2 includes a big hit pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 2 lottery include a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. Furthermore, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Further, hereinafter, the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 12 is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". It says. Also, "satisfaction of the first starting condition" and "satisfaction of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "satisfaction of the starting condition". In addition, the special design losing pattern is also called "loss special pattern" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal pattern losing pattern.

The pachinko game machine PY carries out a series of games such as variable display of special figures and jackpot games based on acquisition of special figure-related determination information and performing special figure lottery when starting conditions are met. And, in order to perform the variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made for the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number and a special figure variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for judging the jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (determination information) for judging the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (determination information) for performing reach determination. The special figure variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number is appropriately bounded. Next, each determination performed using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot judgment uses a jackpot judgment table to determine whether it is a jackpot (whether or not a jackpot game is executed), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with the later-described game state. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as a "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state described later (hereinafter , "High Probability Jackpot Judgment Table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the game state, the jackpot, which is the result of the jackpot determination, and the loss, the determination value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number determination value) is distributed. The pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired special symbol random number with a jackpot determination table associated with the game state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table.

In addition, it is possible to appropriately change how to distribute the special symbol random number determination value for the determination result of the jackpot probability and various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot pattern type determination Jackpot pattern type determination determines the jackpot pattern type (jackpot pattern type) using a jackpot pattern type determination table as shown in FIG. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of the jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the components of the jackpot (contents advantageous to the player) composed of the game benefits given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the types of special symbols that are variably displayed (special figure 1/special figure 2), in other words, the winning caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (the jackpot symbol type determination is generated) is performed. It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and the jackpot used when performing variable display of special figure 2 There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

A plurality of types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired jackpot design type random number with the jackpot design type determination table to determine the type of the jackpot design. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The type of the special figure 1 jackpot pattern and the special figure 2 jackpot pattern can be set as appropriate, but for example, like the jackpot pattern type determination table shown in FIG. As a result, three types of jackpot patterns, jackpot pattern A, jackpot pattern B, and jackpot pattern C, are provided. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10B, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type. Also, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination Reach determination is, for example, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, using a reach determination table as shown in FIG. to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time-saving reach determination table) used in the non-time-saving state, and a reach determination table (time-saving reach) used in the time-saving state. decision table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (not generate reach)", which is the result of reach determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table, and determines whether there is reach or not (whether or not reach is generated).

As shown in FIG. 10 (C), the number of reach random number determination values determined to be "with reach (generate reach)" can be different between the reach determination table for non-time saving and the reach determination table for time saving. It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach judgment performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "losing" is called "with reach (generating reach)" is called "losing with reach", and "no reach ( It does not generate reach)” is sometimes called “no reach”. In addition, "losing without reach" is sometimes referred to as "losing", and "losing with reach" is sometimes referred to as "losing reach".

3-2-4. Special Figure Variation Pattern Judgment In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit or a loss, for example, a special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure fluctuation pattern Judgment table) is used to determine the variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of the variable display of the special figure.

The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters related to the special figure fluctuation time, the so-called "scale", and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production described later. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation pattern, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production (production contents), it is also possible to include identification information regarding the result of the big hit determination and the result of the reach determination. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the type and number of special figure variation patterns.

The special figure variation pattern determination table is the type of special symbol that performs variable display to be determined (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the starting opening where the winning caused by the special figure variation pattern determination was performed It is possible to associate with the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and the variable display of special figure 2 There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing.

And each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is used when the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) and the time saving state used in the non-time saving state There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 1 pending number. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is used when it is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2 and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used for .

And, the variation display of the special figure of the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination is performed by the special figure display device 81 . After the variable display of the special figure, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the result of the variable special figure display (the result of the special symbol lottery), the variable display of the next special figure is not performed immediately, and the next special figure is continuously displayed. , a jackpot game is executed.

Also, each special figure variation pattern can be associated with the effect flow of the special figure variation performance as shown in the third column from the right of the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, a typical production that constitutes the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern will be described.

There are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle production as productions constituting the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production.

The normal fluctuation indicates that the stop-displayed performance symbols have started to fluctuate, and each one of the performance symbols is displayed variably at such a high speed that it is difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special symbols has started. It is a performance to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation production related to the loss fluctuation without reach (the part from the start of the fluctuation of the production pattern to the stop of the fluctuation), and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special figure fluctuation production where the reach occurs is normal fluctuation It may consist of

N reach, immediately after the reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuation, for example, the production pattern that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at that position for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The production pattern slows down, and it is a production that fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The expectation of a big hit suggested by N reach is higher than normal variation and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special figure fluctuation performance ends with N reach, the remaining one performance pattern that fluctuates at the low speed is stopped. In the case of a loss, the remaining one production pattern is stopped with a production pattern different from the production pattern constituting the ready-to-win. When the special figure fluctuation performance is not completed with N reach, the remaining one performance pattern fluctuates again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while the reach is maintained.

The L reach can be executed both when a big win is made and when a loss is made, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will be entered, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the L reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than the N reach, suggesting that the expectation of the big win is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the production pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image more than in the case of the N reach (for example, the left production pattern EZ1 described later). At the upper left of the display section 50a, in a state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the L-reach dedicated background image (the L-reach dedicated video is played). Note that in the L-reach mode, a 2DCG animation image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As for the content of the L reach, a video of a scene different from the game related to the SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as special training for the main character to acquire a special move.

The SP reach can be executed both at the time of a big hit and at the time of a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will occur, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the SP reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer period of time than the L reach, suggesting that the expectation of the big win is higher than the L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the production pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image more than in the case of the N reach (for example, the left production pattern EZ1 described later). At the upper left of the display section 50a, in a state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-only background image (the SP reach-only video is played). In SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As the effect content of the SP reach, an image of a scene in which the team to which the main character belongs and the team to which the main character's rival belongs is displayed.

A battle production|presentation is production|presentation which can be performed, for example after a reach in a time-saving state, and is production|presentation which suggests that a big-hit expectation degree is higher than normal fluctuation|variation. Even in the battle production, the established reach is maintained, but the production patterns that make up the reach are reduced and predetermined positions (upper right of)), it switches to a background image dedicated to battle production (a video dedicated to battle production flows). Also, in the battle effect, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and the "state where the reach is maintained" in the battle production, the production patterns constituting the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle production are displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition to the state in which it is visible in the display unit 50a, for example, it includes a state in which the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or invisible for a predetermined period of time in relation to the dedicated background image. Also, the contents of normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the production that constitutes the special figure fluctuation production is not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

Further, as shown in the second column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 to 12, the special figure variation pattern can be named by associating the big hit determination result and the effect contents of the special figure variation effect. . And the special-figure variation pattern related to the big hit may be collectively referred to as "big-hit variation", and the special-figure variation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as "loss variation".

In addition, regardless of the jackpot determination result, the special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed is "SP reach variation", the special figure variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special figure variation in N reach The special figure variation pattern that the production ends may be collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, the loss variation with reach is sometimes referred to as “loss variation with reach”, and the loss variation without reach is collectively referred to as “normal loss variation”.

3-2-5. Look-ahead determination The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform look-ahead determination using a look-ahead determination table such as that shown in FIGS. be. The look-ahead determination table includes the type of starting opening related to the starting winning (first starting opening 11 / second starting opening 12), in other words, the type of special figure variably displayed according to the starting winning (special figure 1 / special figure 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed by winning the first start opening 11, and the second start opening 12 is won and the special figure There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) for the case where 2 variable display is performed. The prefetching determination based on the first prefetching determination table is also referred to as "first prefetching determination", and the prefetching determination based on the second prefetching determination table is also referred to as "second prefetching determination".

The look-ahead determination table can also be associated with later-described game states (normal game state/high-probability high-base game state/low-probability high-base game state). That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead determination table (normal game state lookahead determination table) used in the normal game state and a lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state look-ahead determination table) and a look-ahead determination table used in the low-probability high-base game state (low-probability high-base game state look-ahead determination table).

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes the first look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state, the first look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the first look-ahead determination table used in the low-probability high-base game state. The first look-ahead determination table used, the second look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state, the second look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the low-probability high-base game state and a second look-ahead determination table used for

In addition, by the prefetching determination using the prefetching determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special figure variation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by the winning to the starting ports 11 and 12 is specified. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning prize is performed. In the process of specifying the special figure variation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a look-ahead determination result.

And, the look-ahead judgment result containing the information about the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a result of the prefetch determination along with its generation. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change what kind of information is specified as the prefetch determination result. For example, information on the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the look-ahead determination result.

As described above, the special figure is variably displayed on the special figure display device 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination. Then, in the variable display of the special symbols, when the big winning symbols are stopped and displayed as the display result (the result of the special symbol lottery), the variable display of the next special symbols is not carried out, and the big winning game is executed continuously. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Jackpot game The jackpot game includes multiple round games with opening and closing of the big winning port 14, the opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game, and the final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round or the beginning of the ending.

In addition, it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Also, hereinafter, the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) round game is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first round game is also called "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is called "10 rounds (10R)".

Then, the pachinko game machine PY controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot game with the jackpot symbol type. One type or a plurality of types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements (jackpot game components) that constitute the jackpot game. The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning opening 14 in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening to be opened, and the time to close until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can control a jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the types of jackpot games and jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), 10 round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), five round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), five round games are performed. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), ten round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), round games are performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), six round games are performed. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning port 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 elapses, The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. Also, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

Also, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed in a different method. You can do so. For example, a device that can be distributed to two winning ports is provided in the game area 6, and when one winning port is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of more round games than the number or a jackpot game consisting of round games less than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, a game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY will be described. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not executed. The non-jackpot game state includes a normal game state, which is a basic base game state, and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Elements that are "advantageous to the player" related to the specific game state include the probability of a big win and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 . That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second start port 12 can be associated with the specific game state.

Advantageous to the player with regard to the probability of a big win means that the probability of a big win is higher than in the normal game state, and it becomes easier to win a big win. In addition, the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player when the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal game state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. It means it takes longer.

The specific game state includes a first specific game state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time are advantageous to the player, and a second specific game state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific game state and a third specific game state in which only the open time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that it is also possible to mount some of the three types of specific game states without mounting all of these three types of specific game states on the pachinko gaming machine PY.

Here, as a partial game state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state and is advantageous to the player is called a "high-probability state". On the other hand, the state in which the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal game state and the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called "normal probability state".

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal game state, A state in which the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is called a "time-saving state." On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal game state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is called "non-time-saving". state.

Here, the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state will be described in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which it is easier to win the second starting port 12 than the non-time saving state. Here, the specific method for making it easy to win the 2nd starting mouth 12 in a time saving state rather than a non-working time saving state is demonstrated.

For example, the time saving state can be made easier to win the second starting port 12 in the time saving state by making the normal figure fluctuation time easier to be shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state let it be decided. As a result, the number of executions of the normal drawing lottery per unit time increases in the time saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the normal drawing lottery per unit time The larger the number of executions, the longer the opening time of the electric tube 12D per unit time.

In addition, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win the second start port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal figure fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time is equal, so once The longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game, the longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time.

Furthermore, by setting the time saving state to a state in which it is more likely to be determined as winning in the winning determination than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win the second start port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as described above, in the non-time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 6600/65536 in the hit determination, whereas in the time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536 in the hit determination. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time and normal figure fluctuation time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability that it will be determined as a hit in the hit determination is high. , the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, so the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time increases.

Thus, in the time saving state, winning is easier than in the non-time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is easy to be shortened, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is easy to be long. By satisfying the three conditions, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and winning to the second starting port 12 can be facilitated. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of balls won to the number of balls fired, is high. Therefore, in the time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed compared to the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

In addition, in a time saving state, you may make it meet only a one part condition, without meeting all the three conditions for opening time per unit time of the 2nd starting port 12 to become long. Ultimately, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state, and the winning to the second start port 12 should be facilitated.

Also, in the time saving state, such as making it easier to select a special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time compared to the non-time saving state, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed per unit time is small, or special The average of the figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure suspension is digested becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure suspension) is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, each specific game state is associated with the content of the advantage for the player, the first specific game state is referred to as "high probability high base game state", and the second specific game state is referred to as "high probability low Base game state” and the third specific game state are also referred to as “low probability high base game state”. Furthermore, the normal game state is also referred to as "low probability low base game state".

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in the normal probability state and non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base game state is normal probability state and time saving state, the high probability low base game state is high probability state and non time saving state, and the high probability high base game state is high probability state and time saving state. It can be said that there is a game state.

Thus, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low-probability low-base game state, a low-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, a high-probability high-base game state, and a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is also advantageous to the player because the jackpot 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot game state and the specific game state can also be called "advantageous game state" which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the ease of winning the second start port 12 is higher than the non-time-saving state. It is in play state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot game state opens the jackpot 14 in which the number of prize balls per winning is greater than the first start port 11 and the second start port 12. It is a game state more advantageous to the player than the state.

Also, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is set first. Also, the jackpot game state is set by performing the stop display of the jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific game state is set when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed. Next, the setting of the specific game state will be explained.

3-5. Setting of Specific Game State The pachinko gaming machine PY can newly set a specific game state upon completion of the jackpot game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in the specific game state. The duration of this specific game state can be set appropriately. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. Also, it is possible to limit the period during which the specific game state can be continued.

When the duration of the specific game state is limited, the specific game state can be terminated when the end condition for the duration is met. Then, when the specific game state ends, the normal game state can be set. Further, as for the high-probability high-base game state, when the end condition is established, the low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability low-base game state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state may be continued until the next big win is won. Also, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state, and when the end condition is established, the normal game state may be set.

Also, the termination condition for the continuation period of the specific game state can be appropriately set. As the termination condition, for example, the number of executions of the special figure variable display can be set. In addition, not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls shot after the jackpot game, the number of passages to the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state An end condition can be set such as derivation of the result of termination in a lottery (so-called “drop lottery”) to determine whether or not. Furthermore, these elements may be set as the termination condition independently or may be set in combination.

These end conditions may be set identically for all specific game states that can be set after the jackpot game, or set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You can Furthermore, the end condition may be changed for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot pattern type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled by the state. Here, the high-probability high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without providing an end condition. Furthermore, the game may be controlled in a low-probability high base game state after the end of the big-hit game relating to the big-hit symbol C and the big-hit symbol E. Here, an end condition can be provided for this low-probability high-base game state, and the end condition can be set to a special figure variable display of 100 times. It should be noted that the relationship between this jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, presence/absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

Further, paying attention to the game profit of the jackpot, the jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the jackpot game is also called "high probability jackpot". Furthermore, a jackpot in which a game progresses in a high-probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable variable jackpot". In addition, the jackpot in which the game progresses in the normal probability state and the time saving state after the jackpot game is also called "time saving jackpot".

4. Main Effects by Game Machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 32. FIG. Incidentally, the pachinko game machine PY is associated with a baseball story about the main characters and the enemy characters as a theme for the production.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a higher-level attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set, as production modes, a customer waiting production mode, a normal production mode, a probability variable production mode, a short working hours production mode and a jackpot production mode.

In the customer waiting production mode, a special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". It is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates that it is in a standby state. A customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 16A, a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY is displayed on the display section 50a. Further, when the first effect button 41k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, a setting screen G101 for setting the effect of the pachinko game machine PY is displayed as shown in FIG. 16(B). is displayed. Settings related to effects include setting the volume of sound output from the speaker 52, setting the brightness of the display section 50a, and setting the frequency of effects to be executed. It should be noted that the setting items related to effects can be set as appropriate. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demonstration video G100.

The normal production mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is in the normal game state. Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of subordinate production modes belonging to the normal production mode. For example, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided as lower-level effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode.

In addition, below, the production|presentation mode of the hierarchy of the lower rank which belongs to production|presentation mode is also called "production stage." Along with that, the first normal production mode is also called "first normal production stage", the second normal production mode is also called "second normal production stage", and the third normal production mode is also called "third normal production stage". say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically after the power of the pachinko machine PY is turned on, the production mode set when the special figure fluctuation display is started for the first time is the first normal production stage ( 1st normal production mode). However, the type of effect mode that is set first is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

When a plurality of production stages belonging to the normal production mode are provided in this manner, the production stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate. For example, the switching condition can be set so that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. Furthermore, as a switching condition, it is also possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure variation effect based on SP reach loss variation is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, reach may occur in the special figure fluctuation production, but the special figure fluctuation production is established for the entire section of the special figure fluctuation production when the reach does not occur, and the reach when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before the reach and a rear part after the reach is established when the reach occurs. The former part is composed of the above-mentioned "normal variation".

Then, in the front part of the first normal effect stage, the background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing the scenery of the city is displayed on the display section 50a. In the front part of the second normal effect stage, the background image (FIG. 17B: second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display section 50a. In the front part of the third normal production stage, a background image (FIG. 17C: third normal background image G113) mainly representing the inside of the restaurant is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and in the normal effect mode A dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach.

The dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a background image common to the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

In addition, the normal production mode can be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal production mode may be a production mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state. Alternatively, it may be set only in the "high-probability low base game state", a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Furthermore, in the low-probability low-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state that occur under certain conditions, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

The probability variation production mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is a high probability high base game state. In the first part of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. . Also, in the latter part of the variable probability production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability production mode is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode can be set in the "low-probability high-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and is either the low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability high-base game state, and is at least time-saving. It is a production mode indicating that it is in a state. In the former part of the time-saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. . In addition, in the latter part of the time saving production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time saving production mode is displayed.

It should be noted that the time-saving production mode is set only in the low-probability high base game state, and can also be a production mode indicating that it is in the low-probability high base game state.

In addition, for either or any one of the variable probability production mode and the short production time production mode, as in the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are further provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied, the production stage is switched. You can do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18A, an opening image G1 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and a right-hand shot image G2 prompting "right-hand shot" are displayed on the display unit 50a. A jackpot opening production is displayed. In addition, during the opening, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as a jackpot opening effect in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

Further, in the jackpot effect mode, as shown in FIG. 18(B), during the round game in the jackpot game, the display unit 50a continuously displays the right shot image G2 from the opening and the round image indicating the number of rounds. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a number-of-balls image G4 suggesting the number of balls paid out are displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, the display unit 50a displays a background image (background for round An image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display unit 50a indicates the ending image G5 indicating the production mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of awarded balls. A jackpot ending production is performed in which a total winning ball number image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed in the background of the ending image G5 and the total number of winning balls image G6 on the display unit 50a as a jackpot ending effect. be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as "jackpot game effect" as the effect executed in the big win game. That is, a big hit game effect is performed in the big win effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, the special figure fluctuation production will be described. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko machine PY has a special figure variation pattern and a special figure lottery result related to the variable display of the special figure (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) etc., the special figure fluctuation production is executed.

In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display unit 50a so as to be superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the variable display of performance symbols, the game stops after the performance symbols are varied. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display of the effect design are performed, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the effect design is performed. And, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is informed by the stop display of the production design.

It should be noted that, in the special figure variation effect performed by the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, a special effect device using various production devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board movable device 55, a first production button device 41, and a second production button device 42 It is possible to perform figure variation effects.

Next, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described in the special figure variation effect executed according to the special figure variable display. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and is provided in a plurality of types. In detail, one of the constituent elements of the performance design constitutes identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of performance design are provided according to the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), it is possible to configure nine performance symbols by configuring the performance symbols from numbers 1 to 9. Then, the production design including the number "1" is set as the production design G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For the sake of convenience, when dealing with individual production designs without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "production designs G10".

Also, the number portions of the production symbols G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The number portions of the effect symbols G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, a color is included in the component of the production pattern G10. It should be noted that the configuration of the production pattern G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the left side, the center and the right side of the display unit 50a are divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction. It can be a region 50b3. A production design G10 is displayed in each of the left production design area 50b1, the middle production design area 50b2, and the right production design area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first stage part of the special figure fluctuation production, the production design G10 displayed in the left production design area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left production design EZ1", and the production design G10 displayed in the middle production design area 50b2. The effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "the middle effect symbol EZ2" and the "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left production design area 50b1, the middle production design area 50b2, and the right production design area 50b3, the production design G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the production design in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is described as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

In addition, as will be described later, in the special figure fluctuation production, the variation display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but finally, the special figure lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type, reach determination result) is shown. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in the mode. Then, when notifying a big hit as a result of the special lottery, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three performance symbols G10 with the same number are arranged side by side (so-called "double eyes"). Therefore, hereinafter, the effect pattern G10 composed of the same numbers constituting the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 stopped and displayed when informing a big win is referred to as a "big win effect pattern". For example, when the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed as "7.7.7", the jackpot production pattern is "production pattern G10g", and when they are stopped as "9.9.9", the jackpot production pattern is " production pattern G10i”. Further, the jackpot effect design may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect design. For example, if the jackpot performance pattern is "production pattern G10g", the jackpot production pattern is "7", and if the jackpot production pattern is "production pattern G10i", the jackpot production pattern is "9". In addition, as will be described later, in the special figure fluctuation production, the special figure lottery result is completely shown when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special figure fluctuation production, before the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). This is because the contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed once may be changed. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode showing a certain jackpot (relatively disadvantageous to the player), they are changed to a mode showing another jackpot (relatively advantageous to the player). may be Therefore, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (before being changed) in such a manner that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 initially indicate a big hit, the performance symbols G10 consisting of the same numbers constituting the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Also referred to as "jackpot effect pattern".

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation performance, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are the same number performance symbols G10. Reach may be performed with a temporary stop display (temporary stop display). As will be described later, the ready-to-win is an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state, and by performing the ready-to-win, the chance for the big win is increased. Therefore, the effect symbol G10 composed of the same numbers constituting the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 related to reach is called "ready-to-win effect symbol". For example, when the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with the effect symbol G10a of "1", the ready-to-win effect symbol becomes "effect symbol G10a", and the temporary stop display is performed with the effect symbol G10a of "3". , the ready-to-win production pattern is "production pattern G10c". Further, the ready-to-win production pattern may be abbreviated by the number included in the production pattern. For example, if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10a", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10c", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, a small pattern area 50c for variably displaying a small pattern can be provided in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end portion of the display portion 50a. In the small design area 50c, the small design can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol. The design of the small pattern can be appropriately set, but for example, the number part of the effect pattern G10 can be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left effect pattern region 50b1, the middle effect pattern region 50b2, the right effect pattern region 50b3, and the small pattern region 50c are indicated by dashed lines. These are shown to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

In addition, as described above, there are normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects as effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation effect. Some of these are described here.

4-2-1. Normal variation The pachinko game machine PY can perform normal variation first in the special figure variation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal variation will be specifically described. As small patterns, a left small pattern KZ1, a medium and small pattern KZ2, and a right small pattern KZ3 corresponding to the left production pattern EZ1, the middle production pattern EZ2, and the right production pattern EZ3 are variably displayed in the small pattern area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), in the display section 50a, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbol KZ2 and the right small symbol are displayed. When the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the pattern KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and the variable display of the special figure is started, FIG. As shown in , the special figure fluctuation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small pattern KZ1, the middle and small pattern KZ2 and the right small pattern KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can be made different from the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. For example, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling the respective performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. It is also possible to change the position one after another at a fixed position. Incidentally, the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be made the same.

Further, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at a high speed immediately after the variable display is started. While the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at high speed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically background images such as the background images G111 to G114. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of this special figure is a special figure variation pattern of no reach loss (for example, normal loss variation), the end of the variable display of the special figure (special figure stop display), stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in the losing eyes peculiar to the reachless losing (so-called "breaking eyes").

For the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. As shown in 20(D), the right effect symbol EZ3 is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stop (temporary stop) at the center position.

Finally, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) while lined up in the horizontal direction at the approximately center position in the vertical direction, are completely completed all at once, as shown in FIG. 20(F). , and the stop is confirmed (the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed). When the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) are completely stopped by loose stitches, that is, when the final stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, three small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is stopped all at once with the same loose stitches as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed.

It should be noted that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped means that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move greatly as in the case of scroll display, but sway slightly or reciprocate slightly on the spot. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed. A definitive stop indication may be broadly referred to as a “stop indication”. Also, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the production patterns are stopped in the order of the left production pattern EZ1 → right production pattern EZ3 → middle production pattern EZ2, but the order of stopping ( method) is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, establishment of reach will be described. Even if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern (for example, N loss fluctuation) with reach, basically in the same manner as the case of no reach described above, in the display unit 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 21(B), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. As shown in 21(D), the right performance symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are aligned horizontally at substantially the center position in the vertical direction and are temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped), and ready-to-win is established. When reach is established, an image (image suggesting reach establishment) G11 indicating that reach is established is displayed. Incidentally, even if the reach is established with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the ready-to-win is established, the production symbols are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the order of the left production pattern EZ1 → the right production pattern EZ3, but the order (method) of the temporary stop is this. can be set as appropriate. Also, the number of the production pattern that constitutes the ready-to-win is not limited to "5". Further, the position for provisionally stopping (temporary stopping) is not limited to the substantially center position in the vertical direction. Also, the direction in which the performance symbols constituting the ready-to-win are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special figure fluctuation production in the case of no reach loss and the interval from the start of the special figure fluctuation production to the establishment of the reach when reach occurs can be made normal fluctuation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special figure variation pattern. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute various announcement effects such as a so-called "pseudo-continuation", a cut-in announcement, a line announcement, etc. until the ready-to-win is established. Alternatively, it is possible to plunge into a so-called "zone" until reach is established.

4-2-3. N reach The pachinko game machine PY can perform N reach when reach is established after normal variation. The N-reach is an effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special lottery may have been a "big win", and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. Next, the N reach will be specifically described.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point. In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 22A, the state when the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N-reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the middle effect symbol EZ2 that is displayed (scrolled) at high speed in the normal mode gradually decelerates.

When the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure variation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, N loss variation), from the state where the reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 is provisionally at the vertical direction approximately center position Stop (temporary stop) at the end and stop display of the production pattern indicating the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-1), the middle production pattern consisting of numbers ("4" in FIG. 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers constituting the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), as shown in FIG. Stop display of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 is performed with the eyes.

In addition, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) are completely stopped by the losing eyes peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, 3 The two small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped all at once with the same losing pattern with reach as the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the content of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

When the special figure fluctuation production does not end in N reach, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-2), when the remaining one medium production pattern EZ2 that has not stopped fluctuates again at high speed, the entire display unit 50a gradually It becomes white, and as shown in FIG. 22(D-2), it may develop (switch) to L reach or SP reach after whiteout.

4-2-4. L reach Pachinko game machine PY can perform L reach after N reach. The L reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility of the result of the special lottery being a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. It should be noted that even in the L reach, established reach is maintained, for example, as shown in FIG. Moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display portion 50a) that does not overlap the small symbol area 50c in the portion 50a.

Further, at the start of the L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, a background image exclusively for the L reach (L reach background image G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L-reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Three is developed. The content of the story of the moving image related to the L-reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character confesses to a girl.

When the L-reach background image G114 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 23A, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a certain meeting place. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23B, a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at substantially the center of the display portion 50a, as the middle effect pattern EZ2, the effect pattern of the number "5" forming the reach and the effect pattern of the number "4" not forming the reach appear. Then, it rotates slowly so that it comes out from the back side to the front side and then returns to the back side.

While the production pattern of number "4" and the production pattern of number "5" are continuously rotated, the three related to the background image G114 for L reach advances. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), the main character confesses to the girl. At this time, at the approximate center of the display part 50a, the effect pattern of the number "5" which constitutes the reach and the effect pattern of the number "4" which does not constitute the reach mutually repel the opponent. collide with. Since the production pattern of the number "5" constitutes the reach, and the production pattern of the number "4" does not constitute the reach, the production pattern of the number "4" is flipped off and the production pattern of the number "5" is replaced. If it remains, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big win is established, while when the performance symbol of the number "5" is flipped away and the performance symbol of the number "4" remains, the performance of the mode indicating reach loss. The stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene of FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L-reach, and a production suggesting a big win (jackpot suggesting production) is executed or a production suggesting a loss (loss suggesting production) is executed. It constitutes a branch point (so-called “hit-lose branch point”) where it branches.

At the win-lose branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the special figure variable display is the jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After the display, as shown in FIG. 24(B-1), the main character who is pleased with the successful confession is displayed, and the speaker 52 outputs a predetermined sound effect. At this time, together with the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 of the number "5" which constitute the reach, the medium effect pattern EZ2 of the number "5" which constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display part 50a. displayed in the form. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the main character who is pleased with the successful confession and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitutes a jackpot suggestive effect. After the big hit suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating the big win.

On the other hand, after the winning branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the background image G114 for L reach is displayed without a jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in 24(A-2), the display unit 50a displays a close-up of a girl with a sad expression, and then, as shown in FIG. 24(B-2), she fails to confess and is disappointed. Shows the main character. At this time, along with the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 of the number "5" which constitutes the reach, the middle production pattern EZ2 of the number "5" which does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped in the center of the display part 50a. is displayed. That is, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach-losing.

The display of the main character, who is disappointed because he failed to confess, constitutes a production suggesting failure. After the loss suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 24(C-2), stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the losing eyes for ready-to-win.

4-2-5. SP reach In addition, the pachinko game machine PY can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility of the result of the special lottery being a "big win" is higher than the L reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. It should be noted that even in SP reach, established reach is maintained, for example, as shown in FIG. Moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display portion 50a) that does not overlap the small symbol area 50c in the portion 50a.

Further, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25A, a background image dedicated to SP reach (background image G115 for SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the moving image related to the SP reach background image G115 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character and an enemy character who are rivals of the main character face each other. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, and the enemy character is a baseball batter.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 25A, an enemy character appears, and then, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25C, a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws the ball, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character is about to be settled. This scene constitutes a branching point (win-lose branching point) at which the main character wins and suggests a big win in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, or loses and suggests a loss.

After this win-lose branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a big hit variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the confrontation, as shown in FIG. 27(B-1), the main character who strikes out the enemy character and shouts on the mound is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.

The display of the main character screaming after winning the confrontation and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute the big win suggestive presentation. After the big hit suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating the big win.

27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the main character who is disappointed after being defeated in the confrontation constitutes the production suggesting failure. After the losing indication effect, as shown in FIG. 27(C-2), stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the losing eyes for ready-to-win.

Next, the movable body production and the operation production performed in the special figure fluctuation production will be described. The movable body production and the operation production are the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, and N reach, and even when they are performed as part of these productions in the form of being incorporated in the jackpot game production, etc., and independent of these productions. may be performed. First, the movable body production will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a movable body effect involving the action of the movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body production is, for example, a production using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a production that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body production functions as a production that suggests development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 is activated, and the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position in a front view, and held at that position for a predetermined time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the board movable body 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28C, the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change or add the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body presentation.

4-4. Operation Effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko game machine PY provides an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect according to the operation of the first effect button 41k, the second effect button 42k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure fluctuation effect or a big hit game effect. It is possible to perform operation effects including The operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance. It works as a performance.

For example, as described above, when the hit-drop junction is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period (operation valid period) during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 41k is valid occurs, and with the occurrence of this operation valid period , as shown in FIG. 29(A), an effect (operation prompting effect) for prompting the operation of the first effect button 41k is performed.

In the operation promotion effect, a first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first effect button 41k to be operated, and an image (depression An operation image) G12b and an image (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 41k.

Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that FIG. 29B shows a state in which the effective operation period has occurred and 1/3 of the effective operation time has elapsed.

Then, when the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 41k is pressed in the operation valid period, or the first production button in the operation valid period After the remaining time of the valid operation period expires without the operation of 41k, the operation result presentation is performed.

As an operation result presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable body presentation. Further, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result presentation. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the board movable body 55k rises, thereby completing the operation result rendering. When the operation result production ends, a jackpot suggestion production is performed.

On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first effect button 41k is pressed during the operation valid period, or the first effect button 41k is pressed. Even if the remaining time of the performance button operation effective period expires without being performed, the operation result performance is not performed, and the failure suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board movable device 55 and the display of the effect image G13, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special figure variation performance, and can be executed in the big hit performance as well.

4-5. Look-Ahead Effect Next, a look-ahead effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display that is the target of the special figure reservation will be described. The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a look-ahead performance for the special figure 1 suspension or the special figure 2 suspension in which the big hit determination is not performed based on the result of the look-ahead determination at any timing of the special figure variation performance. . The look-ahead performance is a performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win with respect to the special figure 1 reserve or the special figure 2 reserve, and functions as a performance for expecting a big win from before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reserve. As an example of the look-ahead effect, there is a pending change notice using a pending effect representing a special figure pending. Here, the suspension effect and the suspension change notice performed in the normal effect mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the suspension effect is performed in a suspension display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section of the lower end of the display section 50a. The reserved display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the reserved display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the horizontal direction. That is, in the reservation display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is performed first based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, which occurs first among the special figure 1 reservations being reserved. A pending icon representing the special figure 1 pending is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to the fourth area 50d4, based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, which occurs second to fourth in the reserved special figure 1 reservation A hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold in which the special figure 1 variable display is performed in the 2nd to 4th is displayed.

In the following, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1". Similarly, the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the fourth area 50d4 "reserved order 2 special figure 1 hold", "reserved order 3 of It is called "special figure 1 reservation" and "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, for the existing special figure 1 reservation, it is called "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order of occurrence.

A display area 50e is formed to the left of the reserved display area 50d. In the display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d. Although not included, the display of the pending icon and the display of the relevant icon are related, so hereinafter, the display of the pending icon and the display of the relevant icon will be collectively referred to as "holding effect". Also, the pending icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon". Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation display during execution indicated by the icon is also referred to as "the fluctuation".

In FIG. 30(A), the reserved display area 50d and the display area 50e are indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are indicated by broken lines. It is shown to show the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the holding effect will be described. In the following description, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is during the special figure 1 variable display (during the special figure variation production), and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 suspension that occurred first among the currently suspended special figure 1 suspension (reservation order 1 special figure 1 suspension) is displayed, and in the second region 50d2 (not shown), the special figure 1 suspension that occurred next to the special figure 1 suspension represented by the suspension icon HA2 (reservation order 2 A pending icon HA3 representing special figure 1 pending) is displayed. In addition, the icon HA1 representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed in the display area 50e (not shown). Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30B is the normal mode.

In this way, in the suspension effect, they are displayed side by side from the left end of the suspension display area 50d to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 suspension has occurred. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol suspension storage unit 105 is individually displayed with a suspension icon. be.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the icon HA1 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 suspension representing the suspension icon HA2, the suspension icon HA2 and the suspension icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown). to the first area 50d1. That is, the suspended icon HA2 and the suspended icon HA3 that have been displayed are shifted one by one to the left. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 pending represented by the pending icon HA3 is the first special figure 1 pending among the currently pending special figures 1 pending. This is to adapt the pending icon HA2 and the pending icon HA3 to the situation in accordance with the fact that the special figure variable display is started next.

In addition, since the pending icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the display area 50e. That is, as a word before "icon", the icon displayed in the reserved display area 50d is "reserved", and the icon displayed in the display area 50e is "relevant". In other words, when the pending icon is displayed, if the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is established for the special symbol pending indicated by the pending icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the starting condition is started. A corresponding pending icon is displayed as the icon.

When the reserved icon changes to the relevant icon, in other words, when the icon moves from the reserved display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged about twice as it moves from the reserved display area 50d to the display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when the game ball enters the first start port 11 and special figure 1 suspension occurs, as shown in FIG. An icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when the special figure 1-related random number is acquired by winning the first starting port 11, one common icon is displayed. This icon disappears when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (suspended state and running state) , it will exist under different names (pending icon and the icon in question).

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure variation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can display the pending icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on the win/fail information and the special figure variation pattern information. Displaying this pending icon in a special mode is called "holding change notice".

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when the pending change notice is given, the player can expect to win a big win by variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the pending icon. . Next, a specific example of the pending change notice will be described. As a specific example of the pending change notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the pending icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) is a special mode.

As one type of pending change notice, it becomes a special mode immediately after the pending icon is displayed. There is a pending notice type. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation (situation of FIG. 30(D)) before the pending icon HA4 is displayed, the game ball wins the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 pending occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension, the suspension icon HA4 of the normal mode is displayed in the above-described second region 50d2 (not shown). In the drawing, the hold icon in the normal form appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if it is made completely stationary, the display position does not move. It may be configured so as to sway lightly on the ground.

Then, immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (hold change notice is performed). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after being displayed, but it may be displayed in the special mode to eliminate the period of display in the normal mode.

As another type of hold change notice, there is a hold notice type that becomes a special mode when the hold icon moves, in other words, a hold change notice is performed during the shift of the special figure 1 hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation (situation of FIG. 30(D)) before the pending icon HA4 is displayed, the game ball wins the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 pending occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension, the second region 50d2 (not shown) of the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) is displayed as the suspension icon HA4. to be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 suspension represented by the suspension icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 50d1 as shown in FIG. The reserved icon HA3 moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the reserved icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (hold notice is performed). .

Moreover, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes relating to the pending change notice, so that the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the pending icon is associated with the color of the pending icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the pending icon. Here, white is the normal aspect and green, red, and gold are special aspects. The degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white<green<red<gold.

In addition, the look-ahead effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA. It is possible to execute using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the operation by the device 55 . Furthermore, as the effect mode of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues without interruption until the special figure fluctuation display is started after execution such as a pending change notice by the pending icon HA, stop display of the effect pattern It may be an intermittent and continuous effect mode such as every time the is performed or every time the variable display of the effect pattern is started.

5. Game Control by Game Control Microcomputer 101 [Game Control Main Processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 42. FIG. It should be noted that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. A plurality of processes in the flowchart can be executed in parallel or changed in execution order as appropriate within a range in which the contents of the processes are not inconsistent.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 . The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the game control board 100 reads and executes a game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103 when the pachinko game machine PY is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, power-on process (S001) is performed.

The game control microcomputer 101 first performs permission setting for access to the game RAM 104 in the power-on process. As a result, information can be written to or read from the game RAM 104 . Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 192 mounted on the game control board 100 has been specifically operated (whether it is ON).

If the RAM clear switch 192 is not specifically operated, the game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the power-off flag is ON. The power-off flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of power-off, and is a flag that is turned on in power-off monitoring processing, which will be described later.

The game control microcomputer 101 calculates a checksum if the power interruption flag is ON, and compares this with the checksum calculated at the time of the power interruption. The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the game RAM 104 as numerical values.

If the checksum values match, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are normal, and sets and manages the work area of the game RAM 104 when power is restored. In this setting process, the power recovery information is read from the game ROM 103 and set in the work area of the game RAM 104 . After that, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power-off flag and performs power-on command setting processing.

In the power-on command setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a setting process for outputting a power-on command to the effect control board 120 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, a timer is set for a predetermined time until the power-on command is output, and subtraction of the time set in the timer is started. When the subtracted value of the timer becomes "0", it means that the predetermined time has passed, so the power-on command is set in a predetermined output buffer of the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加As a result, the set power-on command is output to the effect control board 120 in the output process (S101) to be described later. Further, the power recovery information includes information indicating the game state at the time of power failure. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a command indicating the game state at the time of power failure (game state designation command) included in the power restoration information in a predetermined output buffer together with the power-on command. As a result, the set game state designation command is output to the effect control board 120 together with the power-on command in the output process (S101) described later.

In addition, if the power-off flag is not ON, the game control microcomputer 101 may not be normally powered off, or if the RAM clear switch 192 is specifically operated, the game RAM 104 Clear all stored game information. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 initializes the working area of the game RAM 104 . In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104 . Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the RAM has been cleared to the effect control board 120, and performs power-on command setting processing.

After the power-on process, the game control microcomputer 101 prohibits an interrupt (S002), and executes a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), 1 is added to the counter value of various random numbers related to the normal symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information and updated. Counters related to various random numbers (random number counters) are means for generating random numbers by software. When the counter value of each random number counter (random number counter value) reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. At least part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). During the interruption permission, it is possible to execute the game control side timer interruption process (S005). The game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on interrupt pulses repeatedly input to the game CPU 102, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, until the next game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, by normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) Various random number counter values are updated repeatedly. It should be noted that, if an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 when the interrupt is disabled, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands set in an output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) that follows the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 captures the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and uses it as the lower tray fullness data for the game. stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104 for use.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the counter value of various random numbers related to the general figure-related determination information and the special figure-related determination information includes the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt processing ( After the end of S005), it is performed in both the period until the next game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started).

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs sensor detection process (S104), then performs normal operation process (S105), and further performs special operation process (S106). conduct. Sensor detection processing, normal operation processing, and special operation processing will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) and terminates the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005). As other processing (S107), a power-off monitoring process when the power is turned off, a timer provided in the game RAM 104, and the like are performed. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first start port 11, the prize ball counter for the second start port 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning port 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning port 10 are " It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170.例文帳に追加Then, when a prize ball signal is transmitted, update processing is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter associated with the signal.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S002 to S004 of the game control main processing until an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time, and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec ), the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed again. The game control microcomputer 101 is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process (S005) in the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) executed again. command etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If the game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO at S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if the game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES at S201), a predetermined number of game balls General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the general winning hole 10 (“3” in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 .

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status = 1, which will be described later, in other words, whether either the normal pattern variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO at S204), proceed to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES at S204), the counter value of the normal design random number counter (label-TRND-F) (S205), the obtained general pattern random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 86 provided in the game RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 proceed to

In step S207, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 12, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second start port 12 (NO at S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second start port 12 (YES at S207), the predetermined A second starting hole prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second start hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the second start hole 12 (“2” in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the second start hole 12 .

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (specifically, the number of the counter (special figure 2 reservation number counter) that counts the special figure 2 reservation number provided in the game RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "4" or more (is less than "4") ( NO in S209), special figure 2 reservation number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, "1" is added to the special figure 2 reservation number counter, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by "1".

Subsequently, special pattern random number counter (label - TRND-T), jackpot pattern type random number counter (label - TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label - TRND-RC) and special pattern variation pattern random number counter (label - TRND- HP) to acquire the special figure 2 related determination information consisting of, and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start hole 11, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first start port 11 (NO at S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first start port 11 (YES at S214), the predetermined A first start opening prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first start hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the first start hole 11 ("4" in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the first start hole 11.

Next, the special figure 1 reservation number (specifically, the number of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations provided in the game RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more (S216). If the special figure 1 reservation number is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the special figure 1 reservation number is not "4" or more (less than) (NO in S216 ), special figure 1 reservation number addition processing is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, "1" is added to the special figure 1 reservation number counter, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by "1".

Subsequently, special pattern random number counter (label - TRND-T), jackpot pattern type random number counter (label - TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label - TRND-RC) and special pattern variation pattern random number counter (label - TRND- HP) to acquire the special figure 1 related determination information consisting of, and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first prefetch determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 14, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. When the game ball has not entered the big winning hole 14 (NO at S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and when the game ball has entered the big winning hole 14 (YES at S221) It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided big winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "9" (S222). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winning big winning openings 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the basic embodiment, the number of winnings (prescribed number of winnings) to the big winning opening 14 related to the winning balls in one round game is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated, and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "11" or more, that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is incremented by "1" (S223), and the big winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), ending the sensor detection process. It should be noted that in the big winning hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the big winning hole 14 (“9” in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, when the game ball has won the big winning hole 14 (YES in S221), issues a command (big winning hole winning command) specifying that the big winning hole 14 has won a prize. may be transmitted to the effect control board 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, in the big winning hole prize ball processing (S224), controls the production of a command (large winning hole prize ball command) designating that a prize ball has been paid out based on the winning to the big winning hole 14. You may make it transmit to the board|substrate 120. FIG.

A sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided as a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, and based on the detection of the game ball by the sensor, processes other than the processes shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, a description will be given of normal operation processing relating to the control of the normal map display 82 and the electric chew 12D. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing relating to the normal map display 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (steps). "Normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", normal design standby processing (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", normal design variation processing (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. "Normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal design standby process (S1102), hit determination is performed based on the normal design random number stored in the normal design reservation storage unit 86. Further, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined, and the normal pattern fluctuation display of the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82. and change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command according to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal pattern fluctuation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed since the normal pattern fluctuation display being executed started (whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display is terminated). If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has passed, the normal figure stop display is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal design determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed. In the normal pattern determination process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the normal pattern being executed started (whether to end the stop display of the normal pattern) or not), and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern that is stopped and displayed is a winning pattern. If it is not a winning pattern (if the stopped normal pattern is a losing pattern), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

Auxiliary game control processing (S1105) is processing that is performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special action processing]
Next, the special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing relating to the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (steps). "Special action status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special action status" (S1501).

When the "special action status" is "1", the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502), and when the "special action status" is "2", the special symbol variation. Processing (S1503) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "3", a special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "5", game state setting processing (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby when the special symbol variable display and the jackpot game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

Special design fluctuation processing (S1503) is the processing which is done when the special design is indicated fluctuatingly. The special symbol variation processing will be detailed later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special design confirmation processing will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. A game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to a jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. The special action status is changed to "5" when the jackpot game ends. In addition, when each round game is started, a round number specifying command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . Also, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot pattern related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . The state in which the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special action status "4" and controls the jackpot game is the "jackpot game state", and the fact that the special action status "4" is set is the "jackpot game state”.

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting the game state to be controlled after the big win game when the big win game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, a high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high-probability state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the end condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104 . In addition, when controlling in the time saving state after the jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, when limiting the duration of the time saving state, the duration is also set. For example, if the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number (hereinafter referred to as "time saving prescribed number of times") is set to the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating a game state after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the game state setting process.

[Special symbol standby process]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12, the special figure It is determined whether or not the number of 1 pending is "0" (S1608). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first start port 11, It is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES at S1618), the special symbol standby process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO at S1618), special symbol variable display and jackpot game state are performed. A command (customer waiting command) indicating that the customer is not waiting is set in the output buffer (S1619), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process is finished.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" but the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start When there is one or more storage of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning to mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is read out first, and is based on the jackpot determination table associated with the game state. Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss (big hit determination).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type random number is read out and the jackpot pattern type is determined based on the first jackpot pattern type determination table (jackpot pattern type determination). Then, the jackpot pattern data representing the jackpot pattern type is set in a special buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the pattern designation command indicating the jackpot pattern type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加

Also, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the losing design data representing the losing is set in the special figure buffer, and the design designation command representing the losing is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the current non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving state (S1652), then proceed to step S1654, If it is not a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), time-saving After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the big win determination result is "big win". If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read, and the reach random number is compared with the reach determination table corresponding to the current game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is reach or not.

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the result of reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658) Then proceed to step S1660, if there is no reach (NO in S1656), check the current special figure 1 pending number, step S1652 or step S1653 in either special figure 1 variation pattern determination table From select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss according to the number of special figure 1 reservations (S1657) and then proceed to step S1660.

The game control microcomputer 101, in step S1660, reads out the special figure variation pattern random number, and compares the special figure variation pattern random number to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659, Perform special figure 1 variation pattern determination to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern to the output buffer (S1661), and special figure variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern Time is set to the special operation timer (S1662), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

It should be noted that the special action timer is updated by 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. In addition, the special figure 1 variation start command to be set includes information on the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and the special figure variation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) Contains information on the results (information on the special figure fluctuation pattern, including information on the presence or absence of reach and special figure fluctuation time).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 indicator 81a to start the variation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts one storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a to the side where it is read from the current position, and special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a To clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) corresponding to the first reservation in (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reserved number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved indicator 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special action status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1617), and special symbol standby processing is performed. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is finished without executing step S1617.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, the storage of special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12 is one or more If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. Special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are basically the same processing content as special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) .

Special figure 2 determination processing (S1602), except that the table used in the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used in the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since it is the same processing as the special figure 1 determination processing (S1609), the description is omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process ( Since this is the same processing as in S1610), the description is omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 indicator 81b to start the variation display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts one storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b to the side where it is read from the current position, and special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b To clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) corresponding to the 4th reservation in (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 reservations are digested in the order they were reserved.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 reserved number counter (S1606), and changes the special figure 2 reserved number indicated by the special figure 2 reserved indicator 83b by decreasing "1" (S1607 ), change the special action status to "2" (S1615), and proceed to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of special symbols based on the special figure 1 reservation is performed only when the special figure 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of Toku-zu 2 pending is executed with priority over the digestion of Toku-zu 1 pending. And in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation makes it easier for the player to win a big winning pattern that is more profitable than the lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation. In addition, the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed with priority over the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation and the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation may be performed in the order in which the reservation occurred regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbols, that is, whether the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has passed (special It is determined whether or not the operation counter=0) (S1701). If the special symbol variation display is not terminated (NO at S1701), the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is terminated (YES at S1701), the special symbol variable display is performed on the special symbol display device 81. is terminated, and a special symbol corresponding to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or losing special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer at step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure determination time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the special symbol fluctuation display is finished is output to the buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol determination process (S1504), that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has passed (special It is determined whether or not operation counter=0) (S1751). If the special symbol stop display is not terminated (NO in S1751), the special symbol determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol stop display is terminated (YES in S1751), the current normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), it proceeds to step S1757, and if it is in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), it proceeds to step S1757. "1" is subtracted from the value of the time saving remaining number counter that measures the number of times (time saving remaining number of times) (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times) is not "0" (NO in S1755), proceed to step S1757. YES), the time saving state is shifted to the non-working time saving state (the time saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether or not the special symbol that is currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot pattern (NO in S1758), the special action status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special pattern determination process is finished, and if it is a jackpot pattern (YES in S1758), the gaming state is reset ( The normal game state is set.Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0" (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special action status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the jackpot symbol type in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the jackpot game preparation process. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening corresponding to the stopped jackpot pattern is in progress is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot pattern. The time from the time the player is given to the start of the first round) is set in the special action timer. Furthermore, according to the type of the jackpot pattern, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot pattern is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . The opening command corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stop-displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 43 to 47. FIG. It should be noted that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. A plurality of processes in the flowchart can be executed in parallel or changed in execution order as appropriate within a range in which the contents of the processes are not inconsistent.

Also, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the explanation of the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the effect RAM 124 . The performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 when the pachinko game machine PY is powered on.

As shown in the figure, in the effect control main process, first, power-on processing corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the performance CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. It should be noted that the random numbers for effect determination include various random numbers for determining the effect contents such as random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination and special figure variation effect pattern determination random numbers, which will be described later.

As an example of a method for updating the determination random number counter for various effects, the same method as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 can be used. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process ends, command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the production RAM 124 of the production control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation production start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening production start command, a round production start, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a according to the received command (performs various effects based on the image). In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 140, the effect control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various sound effects), and the sub-drive board. Via 162, the frame lamp 53 is lit (executing various effects by light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (executing various effects by action). In addition, various effects include a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect (big hit opening effect, round effect, jackpot ending effect), a customer waiting effect, an operation effect, and a look-ahead effect.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the receive buffer of the effect RAM124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 1ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse of a 1msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs an input process (S4101) in the 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 41a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 42a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process described later in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing suitable for the image effect. is output to the sub-drive board 162 . That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs mobile device control processing (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs timer update processing (S4104). In the timer update process, in order to manage and control the time relating to various predetermined effects, various timers provided in the effect RAM 124 to be described later are updated. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 10msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process, first performs a received command analysis process for analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer at step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described in detail in the basic embodiment described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, based on the effect content indicated by the special figure fluctuation effect data set in the effect RAM 124, etc., the audio data (data for controlling the output of the sound from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161. is output.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data creation processing (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, the light emission data is created based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124 and the like.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. Production control microcomputer 121, in the received command analysis process, first, from the game control board 100 start winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command) received or not, in other words, received starting winning command It is determined whether or not the data is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES at S4301), it proceeds to step S4302.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs start winning process in response to the game ball winning the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12. FIG. In the start winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command reserve storage unit 125 in the RAM 124 for performance. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit. The look-ahead effect includes not only a pending change notice of displaying the pending icon in a special mode, but also a continuous notice effect performed over a plurality of continuous variable display of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 outputs a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display section 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control according to the content of the prefetch effect indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the image control board 140 is performing the prefetch effect by the image. A sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (performs the prefetch effect by the sound), and the frame lamp 53 is emitted via the sub-drive board 162 (performs the prefetch effect by light emission), and the board movable body It is possible to activate 55k (perform a look-ahead effect by action).

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the design designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the design designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the design designation command is not received (NO at S4303), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4305. is stored in the pattern designation command storage unit 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command is stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure fluctuation start command is not received (NO in S4305), while proceeding to step S4307, if the special figure fluctuation start command is received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are determined. , Special figure fluctuation production start processing (S4306) for starting the special figure fluctuation production is performed.

The production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure fluctuation start command in the special figure fluctuation start command storage unit 127 in the production RAM 124 in the special figure fluctuation production start processing. Next, based on the contents of the stop special figure indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 (type of jackpot symbol, loss special figure) and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed to EZ3, and the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop symbol to determine the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special figures and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure variation pattern. In each stop design pattern determination table, a plurality of production designs EZ1 to EZ3 and small designs KZ1 to KZ3 have a random number value for stop design pattern determination (stop design pattern determination) so as to have a predetermined allocation rate (%). value) are distributed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as the stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number with the selected stop symbol pattern table in the stop symbol pattern determination, and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for performance. For example, a combination of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so that the special figure variation pattern is a reach-less loss variation, so-called "separate eyes". In addition, if the special figure fluctuation pattern is reach and loss fluctuation, the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are the same, and the middle production pattern EZ2 is different from them. A KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special figure variation pattern is a big hit variation, a combination of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so that it becomes a so-called "double eye" according to the production mode and the type of the big hit pattern. .

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 selects a special figure fluctuation production pattern in which the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are associated based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the staying production mode and the special figure fluctuation start command. A special figure variation performance pattern determination table for performing special figure variation performance pattern determination to be determined is selected. A plurality of special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table, one or more special figure fluctuation production pattern has a random number value for special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment value) are distributed. Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the special figure fluctuation production pattern determination random number counter as a special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment random number, and special figure based on the acquired special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment random number. Variation performance pattern determination is performed.

In the special figure fluctuation production pattern determination, the production control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special figure fluctuation production pattern determination random number with the selected special figure fluctuation production pattern table, determines the special figure fluctuation production pattern, and determines. Data representing the special figure fluctuation production pattern (special figure fluctuation production pattern data) is set in a predetermined area of the production RAM 124, and a special figure fluctuation production start command indicating the special figure fluctuation production pattern is stored in the output buffer of the production RAM 124. set.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined amount from the image ROM 142. The effect image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 performs a special figure variation effect by the image.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation production start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. In addition to the special figure fluctuation production start command by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure fluctuation production by the sound output from the speaker 52, the special figure by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53 The contents of the figure fluctuation production and the contents of the special figure fluctuation production by the action performed by the board movable body 55k are included.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, while the special figure fluctuation production by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed, the special figure fluctuation production contents indicated by the special figure fluctuation production start command transmitted to the image control board 140 In response, output the sound from the speaker 52 through the voice control circuit 161 (execute the special figure fluctuation effect by the sound), and emit the frame lamp 53 through the sub-drive board 162 (special figure by light emission (performs the variation performance), and operates the board movable body 55k (performs the special figure variation performance by the action).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command is stored in the reception buffer. Production control microcomputer 121, if the special figure fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4307), while proceeding to step S4309, if the special figure fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4307), special figure fluctuation A special figure fluctuation production end process (S4308) for ending the production (stopping the variable display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 and performing stop display) is performed.

The production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure fluctuation stop command in the special figure fluctuation production end processing, and appropriately ends the special figure fluctuation production based on the analysis result (production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small pattern KZ1 To stop the fluctuation display of ~KZ3) set the special figure fluctuation effect end command to the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. When the image control board 140 receives the special figure variation effect end command, it ends the special figure variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command is stored in the reception buffer. If the game state command is not received (NO in S4309), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4311, and if the game state command is received (YES in S4309), the game state command is analyzed. , to specify the game state represented by the game state command, and perform a game state setting process for setting the game state (S4310).

The effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 in the game state setting process. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state. Also, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the high probability high base game state. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “02H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the low probability high base game state.

In step S4311, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command is stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO at S4311), it proceeds to step S4313, and if it has received the customer waiting command (YES at S4311), the customer waiting production standby process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting effect standby process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, 30 seconds) from the stop display of the effect pattern to the start of the customer waiting effect as the customer waiting effect. Set a timer. Note that the effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has passed. output buffer.

In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the opening command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), while proceeding to step S4315, if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the jackpot associated with the start of the opening of the jackpot game Opening effect start processing is performed (S4314).

The performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the jackpot opening performance start processing, and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening performance corresponding to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed based on the analysis result. If it is to be executed, the performance content of the jackpot opening performance (jackpot opening performance pattern) is selected, and a jackpot opening performance start command for starting the jackpot opening performance in the selected jackpot opening performance pattern is output from the performance RAM 124. set in the buffer.

In step S4315, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the round number designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command is not received (NO in S4315), while proceeding to step S4317, if the round number designation command is received (YES in S4315), the round production start processing is performed along with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect corresponding to the round game to be started from now on, and executes the round effect if it is to be executed. (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the ending command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command is stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO at S4317), while ending the received command analysis process, if the ending command has been received (YES at S4317), the jackpot ending effect start processing accompanying the start of the jackpot game ending ( After performing S4318) and effect mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start processing, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed from now on, and executes it. The performance contents of the jackpot ending performance (jackpot ending performance pattern) are selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

In addition, in the effect mode setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot pattern indicated by the ending command (the effect mode is set). control).

For example, when the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot pattern A or the jackpot pattern D, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the variable probability production mode suggesting a high probability high base game state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the probability variable effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , the background image G120 for probability variation is displayed as the background image, and BGM for probability variation is output as BGM.

When the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot pattern B, jackpot pattern C, or jackpot pattern E, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects either a high-probability high-base game state or a low-probability high-base game state. Set a time-saving production mode that is difficult to determine or impossible to determine. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns ON the effect mode flag indicating the time saving effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and outputs a time saving effect mode start command indicating that the time saving effect mode is set to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. set to When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , the time saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First Embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as the first embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern in the non-time saving state is the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state described in the basic embodiment It differs from the fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 48 shows a configuration example of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 48, as a special figure 1 variation pattern that can be determined in the non-time saving state, there are THP01 to THP04 for big hit variation, THP11 to THP15 for reach loss variation, and THP21 to THP23 for no reach variation.

In the case of a big win, THP01 is decided with a probability of 20%, THP02 is decided with a probability of 10%, THP03 is decided with a probability of 65%, and THP04 is decided with a probability of 5%.

In the case of reach loss, there is a 3% probability that it will be determined as THP11, a 2% probability that it will be determined as THP12, a 10% probability that it will be determined as THP13, a 30% probability that it will be determined as THP14, and a 55% probability that it will be determined as THP13. THP15 is determined with probability.

If there is no reach and the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 to 2, it is determined to be THP21 with a probability of 80%, determined to be THP22 with a probability of 15%, and determined to be THP23 with a probability of 5%. . On the other hand, if there is no reach and the number of special figures 1 pending is 3 to 4, it is determined to be THP21 with a probability of 5%, determined to be THP22 with a probability of 10%, and determined to be THP23 with a probability of 85%. be done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the normal fluctuation described in the basic embodiment as the production (production flow configuration production) that constitutes the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the non-time saving state, In addition to reach, N reach, L reach, and SP reach, there is SP SP reach.

The SPSP reach can be executed both in the case of a big win and in the case of a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will occur, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Specifically, SPSP reach is an effect suggesting that there is a higher possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state than SP reach.

Also, SPSP reach is progressively feasible from L reach. In other words, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the L reach was started, the L reach is switched to the SPSP reach. Similarly, SPSP reach is progressively viable from SP reach. In other words, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the SP reach was started, the SP reach is switched to the SP SP reach.

In the SPSP reach, the L reach executed before the SPSP reach or the reach established in the SP reach is maintained as it is. However, in response to switching to SPSP reach, the previous L reach or the reach effect pattern related to SP reach changes (promotes) to one that indicates a relatively high possibility of becoming a jackpot gaming state. You may make it so that there is In other words, the so-called "blue symbol" may change to the so-called "red symbol".

Further, hereinafter, the point in time when L reach is switched to SPSP reach is referred to as "L reach SPSP development point". Similarly, the point in time when the SP reach is switched to the SP reach is referred to as the "SP reach SPSP development point". It should be noted that the L-reach SPSP development time belongs to the middle stage of the L-reach, and is earlier than the hit/drop branch point related to the L-reach. Similarly, the SP reach SPSP development time belongs to the middle stage of the SP reach and is earlier than the winning/losing turning point related to the SP reach.

In SPSP reach, a background image dedicated to SPSP reach (background image for SPSP reach) G116 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Although the specific display contents of the background image G116 for SPSP reach can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, the background image G116 for SPSP reach is composed of a 3DCG moving image. A predetermined story (specific story) is associated with the moving image forming the SPSP reach background image G116. This predetermined story is based on the setting that the director of the main character worked at a company before being appointed as director, and mainly consists of recollections of how the director worked when he was working at the company. Note that, hereinafter, the predetermined story related to this SPSP reach background image G116 may also be referred to as a “specific story”.

In addition, the SPSP reach background image G116 is configured in the same manner as the SP reach background image G115 and the L reach background image G114. In the final stage, a branching point (so-called “win-lose branching point”) is reached at which a production suggesting a big win (jackpot suggesting production) is executed or a production suggesting a loss (losing suggesting production) is executed. Then, in the case of the big win variation (long SPSP big win variation, short SPSP big win variation), after the big win suggesting performance dedicated to SPSP reach is executed, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the manner of showing the big win is performed. On the other hand, in the case of a losing variation (long SPSP losing variation, short SPSP losing variation), a loss suggesting effect dedicated to SPSP reach is executed, and then the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a mode indicating losing is performed.

It should be noted that in the first embodiment, the time from the start of the SPSP reach to the hit-drop branch point is about 60 seconds, and the time from the start of the SP reach or L reach to the hit-drop branch point. is set longer than the time of

Next, the flow (production flow) of the special figure variation production based on each special figure variation pattern will be described.

In the special figure fluctuation production based on THP21 to THP23, normal fluctuation with different production time is performed, and the special figure fluctuation production ends with the normal fluctuation.

In the special figure fluctuation production based on THP13, reach is established after the normal fluctuation, N reach is executed after the establishment of reach, and the special figure fluctuation production ends at the N reach.

In the special figure variation production based on THP01 and THP11, the reach is established after the normal variation is executed first. After establishing reach, N reach is executed, and N reach develops to SP reach. Then, the SP reach is executed to the middle (middle stage) and when the SP reach SPSP development time comes, it develops to the SPSP reach, the SPSP reach is executed to the end, and the special figure variation performance ends at the SPSP reach.

In the special figure variation production based on THP02 and THP12, the reach is established after the normal variation is executed first. After establishing reach, N reach is executed and develops from N reach to L reach. Then, when the L reach is executed to the middle (middle stage) and the L reach SPSP development time comes, it develops to the SPSP reach, the SPSP reach is executed to the end, and the special figure variation performance ends at the SPSP reach.

In the special figure variation production based on THP03 and THP13, the reach is established after the normal variation is executed first. After establishing reach, N reach is executed, and N reach develops to SP reach. Then, the SP reach is executed to the end, and the special figure variation performance ends with the SP reach.

In the special figure variation production based on THP04 and THP14, the reach is established after the normal variation is executed first. After establishing reach, N reach is executed and develops from N reach to L reach. Then, the L reach is executed to the end, and the special figure variation performance ends with the L reach.

In the first embodiment, various special figure variation patterns (THP01 to THP04, THP11 to THP15, and THP21 to THP23) are included in the second item from the right of the configuration example of the special figure variation pattern determination table in FIG. Names of Figure Fluctuation Patterns”. For example, the jackpot special figure fluctuation pattern "THP01" that develops from SP reach to SPSP reach is called "long SPSP jackpot fluctuation", and the jackpot special figure fluctuation pattern "THP02" that develops from L reach to SPSP reach is called "short SPSP It is called "jackpot fluctuation", and the special figure fluctuation pattern "THP11" of the loss that develops from SP reach to SPSP reach is called "long SPSP loss fluctuation", and the special figure fluctuation pattern "THP12" of loss that develops from L reach to SPSP reach. is referred to as "short SPSP loss variation".

In addition, the jackpot fluctuations related to SPSP reach (long SPSP jackpot fluctuations, short SPSP jackpot fluctuations) are collectively referred to as "SPSP jackpot fluctuations", and the loss fluctuations related to SPSP reach (long SPS loss fluctuations, short SPSP loss fluctuations) This is collectively referred to as "SPSP loss variation". In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern (SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SPSP loss fluctuation) related to SPSP reach is collectively referred to as "SPSP reach fluctuation".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, in the normal game state and in the special figure variation performance in the normal performance mode, the game state becomes advantageous to the player, apart from the performance flow composition performance such as reach and various reach performances. A specific effect suggesting that there is a possibility, in other words, a specific effect that increases the chances of becoming a game state advantageous to the player when executed may be executed on the display section 50a.

As types of specific effects, there are a first specific effect, a second specific effect, and a third specific effect. The first specific effect is executed in normal variation. The second specific effect is executed in N reach. The third specific effect is executed in a period before the L reach SPSP development time in the L reach and a period before the SP reach SPSP development time in the SP reach.

The first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect differ from each other in terms of the content of the effect, but they are common in that they all consist of image displays in which the director of the main character is involved.

Specific examples of various specific effects will be described later. In the first specific effect, an image (first specific effect image) G51 associated with the first specific effect is displayed on the display unit 50a. An image (second specific effect image) G52 associated with the second specific effect is displayed on the display unit 50a, and an image (third specific effect image) G53 associated with the third specific effect is displayed in the third specific effect. It is displayed on the display unit 50a.

The first specific effect image G51 is composed of a still image showing the director character making a toast with a wine glass. The second specific effect image G52 is composed of a moving image showing how the director character is playing Kendama. The third specific effect image G53 is composed of a still image showing that the director character encourages the main character (Taro A) by saying, "Taro A, do your best!"

By the way, as described above, in the SPSP reach background image G116 displayed in the SPSP reach, an image is displayed in which the director character reminisces about his past work at a company. It is common in that it consists of a display and the director character is included in the image. Therefore, hereinafter, SPSP reach and various specific effects may be collectively referred to as "director effect". In addition, various director effects function as effects suggesting that there is a possibility of entering a jackpot game state in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (increasing the chances of entering an advantageous game state). It functions as an effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state (which greatly increases the chances of entering an advantageous gaming state).

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when the director effect is executed in the special figure variation effect, it is executed once or twice. In the pachinko game machine PY1, there is a high possibility of entering a jackpot game state suggested by various director effects. very likely to become In other words, the execution of the director effect twice suggests that there is a very high possibility of a jackpot game state.

Furthermore, basically, regardless of the type of director's presentation, when the director's presentation is to be performed, a premonitory presentation that suggests that the director's presentation will be performed is performed. The portent effect is configured by displaying an image on the display section 50a. In the portent effect, an image (a portent effect image) G50 associated with the portent effect is displayed on the display section 50a. The portent effect image G50 is composed of a still image in which the characters "director" are displayed inside a white circle.

In the first embodiment, the precursor effect is executed only once regardless of whether the director effect is executed once or twice in one special figure variation effect. Therefore, the execution of one premonitory effect generally indicates the execution of the director's effect, and the notification includes the notification of one execution of the director's effect and the notification of two executions of the director's effect. include.

Next, the execution timing of various director effects and the execution timing of precursor effects will be described. FIG. 49 shows execution timings and indications of various director effects in long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, long SPSP losing fluctuation, short SPSP losing fluctuation, SP losing fluctuation, and L losing fluctuation. It is explanatory drawing explaining the execution timing of production|presentation. Note that in FIG. 49, timing S, timing T, timing U, timing V, timing W, and timing X related to the director's effects, which will be described later, are represented by "S", "T", "U", "V", " W” and “X” are plotted with downward pointing white triangular arrows. Timing A, timing B, timing C, timing D, timing E, and timing F related to the portent effect described later are "A", "B", "C", "D", "E", and It is plotted with a black triangular arrow pointing downward while being labeled as "F".

The first specific effect is the normal variation of long SPSP jackpot variation, short SPSP jackpot variation, SP jackpot variation, L jackpot variation, long SPSP loss variation, short SPSP loss variation, SP loss variation, and L loss variation (special variation effect ). Specifically, the effect time of the first specific effect is 2 seconds, and the first specific effect starts when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the normal fluctuation.

The second specific effect is executed in the N reach of long SPSP jackpot variation, short SPSP jackpot variation, SP jackpot variation, L jackpot variation, long SPSP loss variation, short SPSP loss variation, SP loss variation, and L loss variation. Specifically, the effect time of the second specific effect is 5 seconds, and the second specific effect starts when 5 seconds have passed since the N reach started.

The third specific effect is SP reach for long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SP jackpot fluctuation, long SPSP loss fluctuation, and SP reach for SP loss fluctuation, and L reach for short SPSP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP loss fluctuation, and L loss fluctuation. executed. Specifically, the rendering time of the third specific rendering is 3 seconds. In the case of the long SP SP jackpot variation, SP jackpot variation, long SPSP loss variation, and SP loss variation, the third specific effect starts when 15 seconds have passed since the start of the SP reach. On the other hand, in the case of the short SPSP jackpot variation, the L jackpot variation, the short SPSP loss variation, and the L loss variation, the third specific effect starts when 8 seconds have passed since the start of the L reach.

SPSP Reach is performed with long SPSP jackpot variations and long SPSP losing variations and short SPSP jackpot variations and short SPSP losing variations. In the case of the long SPSP jackpot variation and the long SPSP loss variation, the SPSP reach starts when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the SP reach. That is, SPSP reach is performed by switching from the middle of SP reach, in other words, it is executed progressively. On the other hand, in the case of the short SPSP jackpot variation and the short SPSP loss variation, the SPSP reach starts when 15 seconds have passed since the start of the L reach. That is, the SPSP reach is switched from the middle of the L reach, in other words, it is executed progressively.

In the following, the timing at which various director effects are started may be referred to as "director execution timing". The supervisor execution timing of the first specific effect is called "timing S", the supervisor execution timing of the second specific effect is called "timing T", and the supervisor execution timing of the third specific effect related to the L reach is called "timing U". ”, the timing of supervising the third specific effect relating to SP reach is referred to as “timing V”, the timing of supervising SPSP reach relating to L reach is referred to as “timing W”, and the supervision of SPSP reach relating to SP reach is referred to as “timing V”. The execution timing is called "timing X".

Also, the effect content of the third specific effect when executed in L reach and the effect content of the third specific effect when executed in SP reach are the same, but below, the third specific effect executed in L reach The 3rd specific effect is sometimes referred to as "third specific effect (L)", and the third specific effect executed in SP reach is sometimes referred to as "third specific effect (SP)". Furthermore, the production content of SPSP reach when it is executed progressively from L reach and the production content of SPSP reach when it is executed progressively from SP reach are the same, but in the following, developmental content from L reach The SPSP reach executed immediately is called "SPSP reach (L)", and the SPSP reach executed progressively from the SP reach is sometimes called "SPSP reach (SP)".

On the other hand, a plurality of timings at which the portent effect starts are set. Hereinafter, the timing at which the portent effect starts may be referred to as "prediction execution timing". Timing A, timing B, timing C, timing D, timing E, and timing F are set as precursor execution timings.

Timing A is 2 seconds before timing S when 1 second has passed since the normal fluctuation (special figure fluctuation effect) was started. Timing B is 3 seconds after the start of N-reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing T. Timing C is 6 seconds after the start of the L reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing U. Timing D is 13 seconds after the start of SP reach, in other words, two seconds before timing V. Timing E is 13 seconds after the start of the L reach, in other words, two seconds before timing V. Timing F is 2 seconds before timing W when 28 seconds have passed since SP reach started. It should be noted that the effect time of the portent effect is set to 2 seconds.

Also, as described above, the director effect may be executed once or twice in one special figure variation effect. As a pattern in which the director effect is executed once (director effect once pattern), there are a pattern in which the first specific effect is executed (director effect once pattern 1) and a pattern in which the second specific effect is executed (director effect pattern 1). 1-time effect pattern 2), a pattern in which the third specific effect (L) is performed (1-time director effect pattern 3), and a pattern in which the third specific effect (SP) is performed (1-time director effect pattern 4) There is a pattern in which SPSP reach (L) is executed (director effect once pattern 5) and a pattern in which SPSP reach (SP) is executed (director effect once pattern 6). On the other hand, as a pattern in which the director effect is executed twice (director effect twice pattern), a pattern in which the first specific effect and the second specific effect are executed (director effect twice pattern 1) and a pattern in which the first specific effect is executed A pattern in which an effect and a third specific effect (L) are executed (twice director effect pattern 2), and a pattern in which a first specific effect and a third specific effect (SP) are executed (twice director effect pattern 3) ), a pattern in which the first specific effect and SPSP reach (L) are executed (director effect twice pattern 4), and a pattern in which the first specific effect and SPSP reach (SP) are performed (director effect twice Pattern 5), a pattern in which a second specific effect and a third specific effect (L) are executed (director effect twice pattern 6), a second specific effect and a third specific effect (SP) are executed. A pattern (director effect 2 times pattern 7), a pattern (director effect 2 times pattern 8) in which a second specific effect and SPSP reach (L) are executed, a second specific effect and SPSP reach (SP) are executed. (director effect twice pattern 9), a pattern in which a third specific effect (L) and SPSP reach (L) are executed (director effect twice pattern 10), a third specific effect (SP), and a pattern in which SPSP reach (SP) is executed (director effect twice pattern 11).

In addition, execution timings at which the premonitory effects can be started (executed) are associated with patterns in which the director's effects are executed (one-time director's effect pattern, two-time director's effect pattern).

Timing A is the execution timing at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 1 of the one-time director effect. Timing A and timing B are execution timings at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 2 of one-time director effect. Timing A, timing B, and timing C are execution timings at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 3 of the one-time director effect. Timing A, timing B, and timing D are execution timings at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 4 of one-time director effect. Timing A, timing B, timing C, and timing E are execution timings at which the foreshadowing effect can be started (executed) in pattern 5 of the one-time director effect. Timing A, timing B, timing D, and timing F are execution timings at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 6 of one-time director effect.

Timing A is the execution timing at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 1 of double director effect. Timing A is the execution timing at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 2 of double director effect. Timing A is the execution timing at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 3 of double director effect. Timing A is the execution timing at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 4 of double director effect. Timing A is the execution timing at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 5 of double director effect. Timing A is the execution timing at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in pattern 6 of double director effect. Timing A and timing B are execution timings at which the foreshadowing effect can be started (executed) in the double director effect pattern 7 . Timing A and timing B are execution timings at which the foreshadowing effect can be started (executed) in the double director effect pattern 8 . Timing A and timing B are execution timings at which the foreshadowing effect can be started (executed) in double director effect pattern 9 . Timing A, timing B, and timing C are execution timings at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in the double director effect pattern 10 . Timing A, timing B, and timing D are execution timings at which the precursor effect can be started (executed) in the double director effect pattern 11 .

In this way, when the director effect is executed once in one special figure variation effect, the premonition effect is always executed before that. Also, when the director's performance is executed twice in one special figure variation performance, the premonition performance is always executed before the first director's performance.

In addition, since the precursor execution timing is set two seconds before the director execution timing of each director's production, and the production time of the precursor production is two seconds, the precursor production is executed at the latest precursor execution timing of each director's production. In this case, the foreshadowing effect and the director effect are continuously and integrally executed. Therefore, hereinafter, the precursor execution timing immediately before the director execution timing of various director productions may be referred to as "director production corresponding precursor execution timing". Therefore, the timing for executing the precursor for the director's production of the first specific production is the timing A, the timing for executing the precursor for the director's production for the second specific production is the timing B, and the timing for executing the precursor for the director`s production for the third specific production (L). is timing C, the execution timing corresponding to the director effect of the third specific effect (SP) is timing D, the timing of executing the precursor corresponding to the director effect of the SPSP reach (L) is timing E, and the timing of executing the sign corresponding to the director effect of the SPSP reach (SP) is timing E. Timing F is the execution timing of the sign corresponding to the director's presentation.

Next, specific examples of the foreshadowing effect and the director effect will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the precursor effect, FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first specific effect, and FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the second specific effect. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third specific effect (L), FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third specific effect (SP), and FIG. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of (L), and FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SPSP reach (SP).

As mentioned above, the portent effect can be started at various timings (timing A to timing F), but for example, the portent at timing A (when 1 second has passed since the normal variation (special figure variation effect) started) When the effect is executed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been stopped and displayed up to that point are displayed in FIG. , the entire display section 50a turns white, and a large portent effect image G50 is displayed in the center of the display section 50a. Since the effect time of the portent effect is two seconds, the portent effect ends when two seconds elapse after the start of the portent effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the portent effect image G50 disappears and the entire display section 50a returns to its original state. However, when the first specific effect is executed after the precursor effect, the first specific effect image G51 is displayed as it is without returning to the original background image as shown in FIG. 50(C).

The first specific effect is started at timing S in normal variation. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(A), when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variably displayed superimposed on the first normal background image G111, at the timing S, FIG. As shown, the first specific effect image G51 is cut into the entire display section 50a. Since the effect time of the first specific effect is 2 seconds, the first specific effect ends when 2 seconds elapse after the start of the first specific effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the first specific effect image G51 disappears, the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the first normal background image G111 is displayed. Effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 which are being variably displayed are displayed in a superimposed manner.

The second specific effect is started at timing T in N reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(A), when the N-reach is performed superimposed on the first normal background image G111, at timing T, as shown in FIG. 52(B), A second specific effect image G52 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. As described above, the second specific effect image G52 is composed of a moving image showing how the director character plays kendama. , a video of the director character playing Kendama is displayed as the second specific effect image G52. Since the effect time of the second specific effect is 5 seconds, the second specific effect ends when 5 seconds elapse after the start of the second specific effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(E), the second specific effect image G52 disappears, the entire display section 50a is whited out, and the N reach ends, and then the L reach or SP reach is reached. Develop (switch).

The third specific effect (L) is started at timing U in L reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 53A, when the L-reach background image G114 is displayed on the display unit 50a and the predetermined story related to the L-reach background image G114 progresses to the scene related to the timing U. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(B), a third specific effect image G53 is cut into the entire display section 50a. Since the effect time of the third specific effect is 3 seconds, the third specific effect ends when 3 seconds elapse after the start of the third specific effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the third specific effect image G53 disappears, and the L-reach background image G114 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. It should be noted that while the third specific effect image G53 is being displayed, it is assumed that the display control of the background image G114 for L reach is progressing inside the image control board 140 . Therefore, when returning to the background image G114 for L reach, the moving image related to the background image G114 for L reach progresses for the effect time of the third specific effect.

The third specific effect (SP) is started at timing V in SP reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54A, when the SP reach background image G115 is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the predetermined story related to the SP reach background image G115 progresses to the scene related to the timing V Then, as shown in FIG. 54(B), a third specific effect image G53 is cut into the entire display section 50a. Since the effect time of the third specific effect is 3 seconds, the third specific effect ends when 3 seconds elapse after the start of the third specific effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the third specific effect image G53 disappears, and the SP reach background image G115 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. It should be noted that while the third specific effect image G53 is being displayed, it is assumed that display control of the background image G115 for SP reach is progressing inside the image control board 140 . Therefore, when returning to the background image G115 for SP reach, the moving image (specific story) related to the background image G115 for SP reach progresses for the production time of the third specific production.

SPSP reach (L) is started at timing W in L reach (L reach SPSP development point). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 55A, when the L-reach background image G114 is displayed on the display unit 50a and the predetermined story related to the L-reach background image G114 progresses to the scene related to the timing W First, as shown in FIG. 55B, the entire display section 50a is whited out, and then, as shown in FIG. 55C, the SPSP reach background image G116 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. Since the background image G116 for SPSP reach is composed of a moving image of a specific story, the specific story is subsequently developed over the entire display section 50a as shown in FIG. 55(D).

SP reach (SP) is started at timing X in SP reach (at the time of SP reach SPSP development). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A, when the SP reach background image G115 is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the predetermined story related to the SP reach background image G115 progresses to the scene related to the timing X. First, as shown in FIG. 56B, the entire display section 50a is whited out, and then, as shown in FIG. 56C, the SPSP reach background image G116 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. Since the background image G116 for SPSP reach is composed of a moving image of the specific story, the specific story is subsequently developed over the entire display section 50a as shown in FIG. 56(D).

It should be noted that, in the first embodiment, the special figure variation effect related to the SPSP reach variation ends when the SPSP reach is executed to the end. That is, when the SPSP reach is started, the specific story progresses in the SPSP reach background image G116, and as described above, the win-lose branch point is reached in the final phase. Then, if it is a special figure variation performance related to the SPSP big win variation, a big win suggestive performance (not shown) is executed from the win-lose branch point, and finally the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the big win are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is a special figure variation effect related to the SPSP loss variation, a loss suggesting effect (not shown) is executed from the winning branch point, and the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a mode indicating a loss is finally performed.

51 to 56 show specific examples of when various director effects are executed, but in all cases, various director effects are executed without execution of precursor effects at the director's effect corresponding precursor timing. and In the case where the director's performance is executed after the director's performance is executed at the precursory timing for the director's performance of various director's performances, the various director's performances will start exactly at the timing when the precursory performance ends, but FIG. 50(B). 51(B), FIG. 52(B), FIG. 53(B), FIG. 54(B), and FIG. , and at the start of various director effects shown in FIG. 56(B). That is, in the display section 50a, the precursor effect and various director effects are continuously and integrally performed.

Next, an example of the content of control relating to the director effect and the portent effect will be described. It should be noted that the contents of control described below are examples of the contents of control relating to the director effect and the predictive effect, so the contents of control are not limited to the following contents and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, the production control microcomputer 121 confirms the special figure 1 variation pattern in step S4306 when it is in the normal game state and the normal production mode.

When the special figure 1 variation pattern is long SPSP jackpot variation or long SPSP loss variation, the performance control microcomputer 121 starts the SPSP reach from the SP reach SPSP development time, and the special figure variation performance ends at the SPSP reach. A special figure fluctuation start command indicating the content of the effect to be set to the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is short SPSP jackpot fluctuation or short SPSP loss fluctuation, SPSP reach starts from the time of L reach SPSP development, special figure fluctuation production in the SPSP reach is set to the output buffer of RAM124 for production|presentation.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the special figure fluctuation start command and the special figure fluctuation production data related to the L reach fluctuation, the SP reach fluctuation, and the SPSP reach fluctuation, and the special figure fluctuation production data to the production RAM 124, and then whether or not to execute the specific production , and specific effect determination for determining the effect type when the specific effect is executed.

Specific effect determination is executed with reference to a specific effect determination table. FIG. 57 shows a configuration example of the specific effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 57, the specific effect determination table is associated with special figure variation patterns. Specifically, as a specific effect determination table, a specific effect determination table for long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, a specific effect determination table for short SPSP jackpot change, a specific effect determination table for SP jackpot change, and a specific effect for L jackpot change A determination table, a specific performance determination table for long SPSP loss variation, a specific performance determination table for short SPSP loss variation, a specific performance determination table for SP loss variation, and a specific performance determination table for L loss variation are provided. .

As shown in FIG. 57, as a determination result of each specific effect determination table, a specific effect type and not executing a specific effect are set. The specific effect type as the determination result includes execution of the specific effect. That is, in the specific effect determination based on the specific effect determination table, when the specific effect type is determined, the specific effect of the specific effect type will be executed in the special figure fluctuation effect to be started from now on, while the specific effect is determined not to be executed, the specific production will not be executed in the special figure fluctuation production to be started from now on. It should be noted that the "specific effect type" as a determination result includes one type of specific effect type and two types of specific effect type. When the two types are determined, the determined two types of specific effects are executed in the special figure variation effect to be started from now on.

Each specific effect determination table shown in FIG. 57 is appropriately configured such that the selection rate for each specific effect type and not executing the specific effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 57, any kind of specific effect type may be determined not only in the case of loss variation but also in the case of big win variation. Therefore, the various specific effects are effects suggesting that there is a possibility of entering the jackpot game state, and are effects that increase chances with respect to transition to the jackpot game state.

Also, in the case of SPSP reach fluctuation, two types of specific effect types are not selected. This is because, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of executions of the director effect in one special figure variation effect is two times, and in the SPSP reach variation, the SPSP reach that constitutes the director effect is always executed, and the SPSP reach is executed. This is because the number of executions of the director effect other than reach is one.

By the way, regarding the special figure fluctuation production flow, regarding the SP jackpot fluctuation and SP loss fluctuation, which are in a pair relationship, the selection rate for each type of specific production type is higher in the case of SP jackpot fluctuation than in the case of SP loss fluctuation is quite high. Similarly, with respect to the special figure variation performance flow, the selection rate for each type of specific performance type for the L jackpot variation and L loss variation, which are in a pair relationship, is greater in the case of L jackpot variation than in the case of L loss variation. is considerably higher. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed once in one special figure variation effect, it can be said that the possibility of entering the jackpot gaming state is higher than usual regardless of the type of the specific effect.

Furthermore, with respect to SP jackpot variation and L jackpot variation, the selection rate for one type of specific effect type is generally higher than the selection rate for two types of specific effect type. Similarly, with respect to the SP loss variation and the L loss variation, the selection rate for one type of specific effect type is generally higher than the selection rate for two types of specific effect type. However, rather than the ratio of the selection rate related to each type of specific effect type in SP jackpot variation to the selection rate related to each type of specific effect type in SP loss variation, 2 types of various types in SP loss variation The ratio of the selection rate related to each of the two types of specific effect types in SP jackpot variation to the selection rate related to the effect type is extremely high. Similarly, than the ratio of the selection rate related to each type of specific effect type in the L jackpot variation to the selection rate related to each type of specific effect type in the L loss variation, various two types in the L loss variation The ratio of the selection rate related to each of the two types of specific effect types in the L jackpot variation to the selection rate related to the specific effect type is extremely high. Therefore, the possibility of entering the jackpot game state when the director effect other than the SP reach is executed twice in the special figure change effect related to the SP reach fluctuation and the L reach is higher than the probability of becoming a state. In other words, if the director effect other than SPSP reach is executed twice in the special figure variation effect related to SP reach fluctuation or L reach, the possibility of entering the jackpot game state is extremely high (the transition to the jackpot game state is highly likely). Become).

In addition, the selection rate of each type of specific effect type related to SPSP loss variation is extremely low compared to the selection rate of each type of specific effect type related to SPSP big hit variation. Therefore, the possibility of entering a jackpot game state when the director effect including SPSP reach is executed twice in the special figure fluctuation effect related to SPSP reach fluctuation is the same as the possibility of entering the jackpot game state when the director effect including SPSP reach is executed once. Higher than the possibility of being idle. In other words, when the specific effect is performed once in the special figure variation effect related to the SPSP reach fluctuation, in other words, when the director effect including the SPSP reach is executed twice, the possibility of entering the jackpot game state is extremely high (to the jackpot game state the migration becomes dense).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the director effect is executed, the precursor effect is executed before the director effect is executed. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether the director effect is executed in the special figure variation effect to be started from now on, in other words, when the special figure variation pattern is the SPSP reach variation, or in the specific effect determination, any specific When the performance type is determined, the first portent performance execution timing determination for determining the portent performance timing is performed.

The first predictor execution timing determination is executed with reference to a first predictor execution timing determination table. FIG. 58 shows a configuration example of the first precursor execution timing determination table. As shown in FIG. 58, the first precursor execution timing determination table is associated with the type of director effect (director effect type) executed in the special figure variation effect.

FIG. 58(A) is a configuration example of the first predictor execution timing determination table when the director effect is executed twice in the special figure variation effect. First precursor execution timing determination table for specific effect and second specific effect, first precursor execution timing determination table for first specific effect and third specific effect (L), first specific effect, and third specific effect First precursor execution timing determination table for effect (SP), first specific effect, and first precursor execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (L), first specific effect, and first for SPSP reach (SP) A sign execution timing determination table, a first sign execution timing determination table for a second specific effect and a third specific effect (L), a first sign execution timing determination for a second specific effect and a third specific effect (SP) Table, second specific effect and first precursor execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (L), second specific effect and first precursor execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (SP), third specific effect (L ), and a first precursor execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (L), and a first precursor execution timing determination table for third specific effect (SP) and SPSP reach (SP).

FIG. 58(B) is a configuration example of the first predictor execution timing determination table when the director effect is executed once in the special figure variation effect. First precursor execution timing determination table for specific effect, first precursor execution timing determination table for second specific effect, first precursor execution timing determination table for third specific effect (L), third specific effect (SP) A first precursor execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (L), a first precursor execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (SP), and a first precursor execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (SP) are provided.

Each of the first predictor execution timing determination tables shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 58(B) has a selectivity with respect to each predictor execution timing, which is the predetermined selectivity shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 58(B). It is configured appropriately so that As described above, the execution timing at which the precursor effect can be started is set according to the director effect type executed in the special figure variation effect.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the received special figure fluctuation start command is the L reach fluctuation and the SP reach fluctuation, and the result of the specific production determination is "do not execute the specific production". In this case, an omen effect determination is performed to determine whether or not to execute the omen effect.

The portent effect determination is executed with reference to a portent effect determination table. FIG. 59 shows a configuration example of the portent effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 59, the portent effect determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern. Specifically, as the predictive effect determination table, the predictive effect determination table for SP big hit variation, the predictive effect determination table for L jackpot change, the predictive effect determination table for SP loss change, and the predictive effect determination table for L loss change. There are tables. Each portent effect determination table shown in FIG. 59 is configured appropriately so that the selection rate for execution/non-execution of the portent effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 59, "execute" may be selected both in the case of a big winning variation and in the case of a losing variation. Therefore, if the premonition effect is executed but the specific effect is not executed, there is a possibility of entering a jackpot game state. Specifically, regarding the special figure fluctuation production flow, the SP jackpot fluctuation and the SP loss fluctuation, which are in a pair relationship, the selection rate related to "execute the sign production" is higher in the case of SP jackpot fluctuation than in the case of SP loss fluctuation is much higher. Similarly, with respect to the special figure variation effect flow, the L jackpot variation and the L loss variation, which are in a pair relationship, the selection rate related to "execute the sign effect" is more in the case of the L jackpot variation than in the case of the L loss variation. is much higher. Therefore, it can be said that there is an extremely high possibility of entering the jackpot game state when the specific effect is not executed although the precursor effect is executed.

The effect control microcomputer 121 performs a second predictive execution timing determination for determining the predictive execution timing when it is determined to "execute the predictive effect" in the predictive effect determination.

The second predictor execution timing determination is executed with reference to a second predictor execution timing determination table. FIG. 60 shows a configuration example of the second precursor execution timing determination table. As shown in FIG. 60, the second omen execution timing determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern. Specifically, as the second omen execution timing determination table, the second omen execution timing determination table for SP jackpot variation, the second omen execution timing determination table for L jackpot variation, and the second omen execution timing for SP loss variation A determination table and a second predictor execution timing determination table for the L loss variation are provided. Each of the second precursor execution timing determination tables shown in FIG. 60 is configured appropriately so that the selection rate for each precursor performance execution timing is the predetermined selection rate shown in FIG.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the first predictive execution timing determination and the second predictive execution timing determination, the command (predictive effect start command) indicating the predictive effect execution timing, which is the determination result, is output from the effect RAM 124. set in the buffer.

The portent effect start command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004). Upon receiving the portent effect start command, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 performs the portent effect by displaying the portent effect image G50 on the display unit 50a at the portent execution timing indicated by the portent effect start command. let it start.

In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines any of the specific performance types in the determination of the specific performance type, the command (specific performance start command) indicating the specific performance type that is the determination result is stored in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set.

The specific effect start command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004). When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the specific effect start command, when the execution timing (director execution timing) of the specific effect related to the specific effect type indicated by the specific effect start command comes, the display unit 50a displays: By displaying images (first specific effect image G51, second specific effect image G52, third specific effect image G53) corresponding to the specific effect type, various specific effects, in other words, director effects are started.

Also, as described above, the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004). Therefore, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the special figure variation effect start command related to the SPSP reach, when the L reach SPSP development time or the SP reach SPSP development time comes, the SPSP By displaying the background image G116 for reach, the SPSP reach, in other words, the director effect is started.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a director effect (specific effect) may be executed to suggest that a jackpot game state (advantageous game state) may occur. Before executing , a premonition effect that suggests that a director effect (specific effect) will be executed may be executed, and if the director effect (specific effect) is not executed after the premonition effect is executed, a big hit Since the possibility of becoming a jackpot game state (advantageous game state) is higher than the possibility of not being in a game state (advantageous game state), the execution of the director effect is expected when the premonition effect is executed. Even when the director's performance is not executed, the expectation for the big win game state can be maintained, so that the amusement of the game is improved. In addition, since the director production includes a specific production (first specific production) and an SPSP reach (second specific production), which are different from each other in production mode, it is possible to determine which type of production is performed when the precursor production is executed. Since the player can be thrilled with the fact that the specific performance is executed, the amusement of the game is further improved. Further, the premonition effect may suggest that a specific effect (first specific effect) will be executed, or suggest that an SPSP reach (second specific effect) will be executed. Since it becomes difficult to understand which kind of specific performance is to be executed by executing the performance in substantially the same performance mode, the player can be more excited and the amusement of the game is improved.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. It should be noted that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the first embodiment, the director effect and the precursor effect are executed in the normal game state and the normal effect mode, but the game state in which the director effect can be executed and the effect mode are not limited to those in the first embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Also good. Also, the director effect and the precursor effect may be executable in a plurality of types of game states and effect modes. Furthermore, when the special figure 2 variation is being performed, the director effect and the precursor effect may be made executable.

The specific contents of the director effect and the precursor effect and the execution (start) timing are not particularly limited, so they may be changed as appropriate. Also, although there is one type of execution timing for the first specific effect and the second specific effect that constitute the director effect, they may be executed at a plurality of timings.

Also, in the first embodiment, there are four types of director effects, but one type, two types, or five or more types may be used.

The upper limit of the number of executions of the director effect in one special figure variation effect is 2 times, but this upper limit may be 1 time, 3 times or 4 times.

When the director performance is executed once or twice in one special figure variation performance, the precursor performance of the same performance content is executed, but the performance of the precursor performance when executed once. The aspect may be different from the presentation aspect of the portent presentation in the case of being executed twice. Alternatively, a plurality of performance modes of the foreshadowing effects may be set, and the degree of expectation of the number of executions of the director's effects may differ depending on the performance modes of the foreshadowing effects. For example, there are a first effect mode and a second effect mode in the effect mode of the foreshadow effect, and the degree of expectation for the execution of the director effect twice is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. You can call it high. Note that the effect mode in this case includes specific display contents of the portent effect image G50, the display position of the portent effect image G50, the display time of the portent effect image G50, and the like.

In addition, when the director effect is executed once and when it is executed twice in one special figure fluctuation effect, the precursor effect is always executed at the director effect corresponding precursor execution timing related to the director effect type to be executed. A production may be executed. For example, when the second specific effect and the third specific effect (SP) are executed in one special figure variation effect, the sign effect is executed twice at timing B and timing D. In addition, when the first specific effect and the SPSP reach (L) are executed in one special figure variation effect, the precursor effect is executed at timing A and timing E twice. In addition, regarding the modification example, if the precursor effect is executed but the director effect is not executed, the precursor effect may be executed at any of the precursor execution timings. In this case, it may be possible that the premonition effect is executed but the director effect is not executed two or more times in one special figure variation effect. In this case, as the number of times the premonition effect is executed but the director effect is not executed increases, the degree of expectation for transition to the jackpot game state may be improved.

The director effect is an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state, but the target to be suggested is not limited to the jackpot game state and may be changed as appropriate. For example, a jackpot game state in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively high (the so-called "ball output performance" is relatively high), and a state in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively small (the so-called "ball output performance" is relatively high). All or part of the director's presentation can shift to a jackpot game state in which the number of times round games are executed is relatively high (so-called "ball output performance" is relatively high). It may be a production that suggests that there is a sexuality. In addition, a jackpot game state accompanied by a game state relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a high probability high base game state) and a game state relatively unfavorable to the player (for example, a low probability high base game state) All or part of the director's presentation may shift to a jackpot game state with a game state that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a high-probability, high-base game state). It may be a production that suggests that.

Furthermore, the fact that two director effects are executed in one special figure variation effect, and that the premonition effect is executed in one special figure variation effect but the director effect is not executed is a big hit game. Although it suggests that the possibility of being in a state is extremely high, both or one of these means that in addition to or instead of the extremely high possibility of being in a jackpot gaming state, the execution of a round game is relatively The possibility of transitioning to a jackpot game state with a large number of times (so-called "ball output performance" is relatively high) is extremely high, and / or a game state relatively advantageous to the player (for example, high probability high base game state), it may be suggested that the possibility of shifting to a jackpot gaming state is extremely high.

Also, in the first embodiment, the director effect is performed in the special figure variation effect, but it may be configured to be executable in the jackpot game. In this case, for example, the director effect can be executed in a predetermined round game, and the jackpot game ends in the predetermined round game, or the jackpot game is continued to be executed. By executing the director's presentation, the chances of the continuous execution of the jackpot game may increase. Alternatively, the director effect can be executed in a predetermined round game, and the transition to the first game state is performed in accordance with the end of the jackpot game, and the case where the game state is more advantageous to the player than the first game state in response to the end of the jackpot game. There is a case where the game state shifts to the second game state, and the execution of the advance notice of the lines may increase the chances of shifting to the second game state in response to the end of the big winning game.

Furthermore, the director effect and the precursor effect can be executed as a prefetch effect based on the prefetch determination result, and the special figure variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension related to the prefetch determination starts before the special figure variation occurs multiple times. It may be executable throughout the performance.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as a second embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment displays a decoration image G60 in the vicinity of the reserved display area 50d and the display area 50e of the display section 50a in the normal effect mode. As described in the basic embodiment, the display unit 50a has a first area 50d1 to a fourth area 50d4 (holding display area 50d) that display pending icons in the pending order 1 to the pending order 4, and the icon Although the display area 50e to be displayed is formed, the pachinko gaming machine PY2 displays the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 (holding display area 50d) and the decoration image directly below the display area 50e in the normal effect mode. Display G60.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the decoration image G60 displayed on the display section 50a. FIG. 61(A) is an explanatory view showing an outline of the decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the entire display section 50a, and FIG. 61(B) shows the decorative image G60 and the reserved display area 50d. , and the display area 50e in detail. As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the decoration image G60 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a whole, and is normally displayed at the lower end of the display section 50a in the normal effect mode. However, as will be described later, the decoration image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e may move together.

The decoration image G60 is basically superimposed on the normal background images G111 to G113 except when the customer waiting demonstration video G100, the L reach background image G114, and the SP reach background image G115 are displayed. to be displayed. In other words, the demonstration effect is executed (customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed) in a state where games such as special figure variable display and jackpot games are not performed, or L reach and SP reach are executed during special figure variable display ( L reach background image G114 and SP reach background image G115 are not displayed), normal loss fluctuation and N reach fluctuation continue to be repeatedly executed, the decoration image G60 is a plurality of special figure variable It continues to be displayed seamlessly across displays. Therefore, when a special figure stop display is performed in a mode indicating a failure in a certain special figure variable display, and then the next special figure variable display is started, the decoration image G60 is displayed even when the special figure variable display is switched. , continues to be displayed seamlessly without change.

The decoration image G60 is displayed adjacent to the lower side of the reserved display area 50d, and is displayed adjacent to the lower side of the reserved icon placement image G60a on which the reserved icon is placed. , an icon placed image G60b on which the icon is placed, a pending icon placed image G60a, and a base image G60c like a base for integrally supporting the icon placed image G60b.

The suspended icon placement image G60a is further displayed in a first suspended icon placement image G60a1 for placing a suspended icon (corresponding to suspension order 1) displayed in the first region 50d1, and in a second region 50d2. A second pending icon placement image G60a2 for placing a pending icon (corresponding to the pending order 2), and a third pending icon for placing a pending icon (corresponding to the pending order 3) displayed in the third region 50d3 It includes a placed image G60a3 and a fourth suspended icon placed image G60a4 for placing the suspended icon (corresponding to the order of suspension 4) displayed in the fourth area 50d4. The first suspended icon placed image G60a1, the second suspended icon placed image G60a2, the third suspended icon placed image G60a3, the fourth suspended icon placed image G60a4, and the icon placed image G60b all have a low height. represents a pedestal.

Next, integral movement of the decoration image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e will be described. Note that in the second embodiment, any one of the decoration image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e does not partially separate from the others and moves alone. The reserved display area 50d and the display area 50e move integrally. Therefore, hereinafter, basically, the decoration image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e are considered to be integrated, and the integral decoration image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and The display area 50e is representatively referred to as a "decoration image G60". Therefore, for example, "moving the decoration image G60/moving the decoration image G60" means "moving the decoration image G60 and the reserved display area 50d and the display area 50e integrally/decorating image G60 and the reserved display The area 50d and the display area 50e move integrally."

Further, there are a first movement mode and a second movement mode for the movement mode of the decoration image G60. In the first movement mode, the ornamental image G60 as a whole assumes a posture rotated clockwise by 90 degrees when viewed from the front, and is moved to the left end portion of the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the second movement mode, the ornamental image G60 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and is moved to the right end of the display section 50a. The mode of the decoration image G60 in which the decoration image G60 is not moved shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B is referred to as the "normal mode", and the decoration image G60 in the normal mode is the standard mode of the decoration image G60. Positioned as.

FIG. 62(A) is an explanatory view showing an outline of the decoration image G60 in the first movement mode, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e, and FIG. 62(B) is the decoration image G60 in the first movement mode. , a reserved display area 50d, and a display area 50e in detail. As shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B), when the decoration image G60 is in the first movement mode, the display area 50e is arranged relatively at the upper end, and from there, the first area 50d1, A second region 50d2, a third region 50d3, and a fourth region 50d4 are arranged downward in order. In the second embodiment, the decoration image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the normal mode, and the decoration image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the first movement mode are in the posture , and the display position are different, but the sizes of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, the intervals between the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4, the reserved display area 50d and the display area. It is assumed that other elements such as the distance from 50e have not changed. It is also assumed that the suspended icon and the size of the icon do not change between the decoration image G60 in the normal mode and the decoration image G60 in the first movement mode.

FIG. 63(A) is an explanatory view showing an outline of the decoration image G60 in the second movement mode, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e, and FIG. 63(B) is the decoration image G60 in the second movement mode. , a reserved display area 50d, and a display area 50e in detail. As shown in FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B), when the decoration image G60 is in the second movement mode, the display area 50e is relatively arranged at the lower end, and from there, the first area 50d1, A second region 50d2, a third region 50d3, and a fourth region 50d4 are arranged in order upward. In the second embodiment, the decoration image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the normal mode, and the decoration image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the second movement mode are in the posture , and the display position are different, but the sizes of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, the intervals between the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4, the reserved display area 50d and the display area. It is assumed that other elements such as the distance from 50e have not changed. It is also assumed that the suspended icon and the size of the icon do not change between the decoration image G60 in the normal mode and the decoration image G60 in the second movement mode.

In the following description, the display position of the decoration image G60 in the normal mode, the reserved display area 50d, and the entire display area 50e in the normal mode shown in FIG. Similarly, the display position on the display section 50a with respect to the decoration image G60 in the first movement mode, the reserved display area 50d, and the entire display area 50e shown in FIG. The display position on the display section 50a with respect to the decoration image G60 in the second movement mode, the reserved display area 50d, and the entire display area 50e shown in FIG. 63(A) is referred to as a "second special position". Also, the "first special position" and the "second special position" may be collectively referred to as the "special position".

Further, when the pending display area 50d and the display area 50e are moved to the first special position, the pending icon and the icon are also displayed at the first special position. Similarly, when the pending display area 50d and the display area 50e are moved to the second special position, the pending icon and the icon are also displayed at the second special position. Therefore, the movement of the pending display area 50d and the display area 50e can be regarded as the movement of the pending icon or the icon.

Although not shown, the process of moving the decoration image G60 from the normal position to the first special position can be appropriately set. It rotates clockwise by 90 degrees around the right end, assumes a substantially vertically standing posture in the vicinity of the right end of the display section 50a as a whole, moves leftward while maintaining that posture, and moves to the left end of the display section 50a. It is assumed that the vehicle stops in the vicinity and enters the first movement mode shown in FIG. 62(A). Further, when the decoration image G60 returns from the first special position to the normal position, the movement process is the reverse of that when moving from the normal position to the first special position.

Furthermore, although not shown, the process of moving the decoration image G60 from the normal position to the second special position can be appropriately set. It rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise around the left end, assumes a posture that stands substantially vertically near the left end of the display unit 50a as a whole, moves to the right in that posture, and moves to the right end of the display unit 50a. 63(A) and the second movement mode shown in FIG. 63(A). Further, when the decoration image G60 returns from the second special position to the normal position, the movement process is the reverse of that when moving from the normal position to the second special position.

The decoration image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the movement of the display area 50e from the normal position to the first special position and the second special position are displayed even when the icon or the reserved icon is displayed. The same shall be done in the absence of Further, when moving to the first special position and the second special position when the icon or the hold icon is displayed in the hold display area 50d at the normal position and the display area 50e, the icon or the hold icon and the decoration image G60 are maintained. In other words, when the decoration image G60 moves from the normal position to the first special position and the second special position, the icon and the suspended icon displayed there also rotate and move integrally with the decoration image G60. and

By the way, the movement of the decoration image G60 from the normal position to the first special position and the movement of the decoration image G60 from the normal position to the second special position are effects suggesting that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state. Then, an effect is constructed in which, when executed, the degree of expectation for the transition to the jackpot game state is improved (chance is increased). Hereinafter, the movement of the decoration image G60 from the normal position to the first special position will be referred to as the "first reserved position movement notice", and the movement of the decoration image G60 from the normal position to the second special position will be referred to as the "second 2 holding position movement notice”. In the second embodiment, the possibility of entering the jackpot gaming state is higher when the second holding position movement notice is executed than when the first holding position movement notice is executed.

The "first holding position movement notice" and the "second holding position movement notice" may be collectively referred to as "holding position movement notice". Further, in the second embodiment, the first holding position movement notice and the second holding position movement notice are not executed together in one production opportunity. That is, the second holding position movement notice is not continuously executed from the first holding position movement notice, and the first holding position movement notice is not continuously executed from the second holding position movement notice. In other words, the decoration image G60 that has moved from the normal position to the first special position will not move further to the second special position. Similarly, the decoration image G60 that has moved from the normal position to the second special position will not move further to the first special position. Therefore, when the first holding position movement notice ends, the decoration image G60 returns to the normal position. Similarly, when the second holding position movement notice ends, the decoration image G60 returns to the normal position.

Further, in the second embodiment, as will be described later, the holding position movement notice is executed as a prefetch effect based on the prefetch determination result. Then, it is assumed that the holding position movement notice starts when one second has passed since the holding icon corresponding to the special figure 1 holding related to the prefetch determination is displayed. In other words, the decoration image G60 is assumed to move from the normal position to the special position when one second has passed since the hold icon corresponding to the special figure 1 hold related to the hold position movement notice was displayed.

Furthermore, in detail, when the look-ahead determination result is "SP big hit fluctuation", "L big hit fluctuation", "SP losing fluctuation", "L losing fluctuation", and "N losing fluctuation", holding position movement notice is executed It is possible. That is, when the holding position movement notice is executed, the reach is always established in the special figure 1 fluctuation display corresponding to the look-ahead determination related to the holding position movement notice. The holding position movement notice ends when the reach is established, and the decoration image G60 returns from the special position to the normal position during the period from the establishment of the reach to the start of the N reach.

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY2, when special figure 1 suspension occurs, the suspension icon appears in a normal mode. When the decoration image G60 is displayed at the normal position, and when the decoration image G60 is displayed at the first special position (the first holding position movement notice is executed), the decoration image G60 is displayed at the second special position. When (the second holding position movement notice is executed), a holding change notice may be executed in which the holding icon in the normal mode changes to the special mode. In the second embodiment, when the decoration image G60 is displayed at the normal position (when the reservation position movement notice is not executed) <when the decoration image G60 is displayed at the first special position (first reservation position When the movement notice is being executed) <When the decoration image G60 is displayed at the second special position (when the second holding position movement notice is being executed), the hold change notice can be executed. highly sexual.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY2, three types of special modes are set as special modes: a first special mode, a second special mode, and a third special mode. In the second embodiment, the normal mode is a white circle, the first special mode is a green circle, the second special mode is a red circle, and the third special mode three modes are gold circles. is. Then, in the order of the first special mode<second special mode<third special mode, there is a high possibility that the jackpot gaming state suggested by the special mode type will occur.

Next, an example of control contents related to the holding position movement notice and the holding change notice will be described. Note that the control content described below is an example of the control content related to the hold position movement notice and the hold change notice, so the control content is not limited to the following content, and may be changed as appropriate. .

For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4302 when it receives the first starting winning command, but in step S4302, first, shows the reservation order related to the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the first starting winning command, A command (suspension performance command) indicating that a suspension icon is displayed in response to the occurrence of special figure suspension 1, in other words, the determination of a big hit or the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display is given to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 is currently, when the special figure fluctuation display is being performed, based on the received first start winning command, whether or not to execute the holding position movement notice, and if it is executed, the holding position movement notice (holding position movement notice type: first holding position movement notice, second holding position movement notice). In addition, the microcomputer 121 for production|presentation control shall perform the holding|maintenance change advance notice determination mentioned later, without performing a holding position movement advance notice determination, when it is not during a special figure fluctuation display. Therefore, in the second embodiment, it means that the reservation position movement advance notice is not performed for the special figure 1 reservation that occurs when the special figure fluctuation display is not performed.

The holding position movement advance notice determination is executed with reference to a holding position movement advance notice determination table. FIG. 64 shows a configuration example of the holding position movement notice determination table. As shown in FIG. 64, the holding position movement advance notice determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern, which is the result of the prefetch determination indicated by the first start winning command. Specifically, as the holding position movement notice determination table, the holding position movement notice judgment table for SP big hit fluctuation, the holding position movement notice judgment table for L jackpot fluctuation, the holding position movement notice judgment table for SP loss fluctuation, L A holding position movement advance notice determination table for loss fluctuation, a holding position movement advance notice judgment table for N loss fluctuation, and a holding position movement advance notice judgment table for normal loss fluctuation are provided.

In each holding position movement notice determination table, "first holding position movement notice", "second holding position movement notice", and "no execution" are set as the judgment results. The "first holding position movement notice" as the determination result corresponds to executing the first holding position movement notice, and the "second holding position movement notice" as the judgment result is executing the second holding position movement notice. "Do not execute" as a determination result corresponds to not executing the holding position movement notice. Each holding position movement notice determination table shown in FIG. 64 is set so that the selection rate for each judgment result (first holding position movement notice, second holding position movement notice, not executed) becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. are configured accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 64, "first holding position movement notice" and "second holding position movement notice" may be selected both in the case of a big win change and in the case of a loss change. Therefore, when the first holding position movement notice or the second holding position movement notice is executed, there is a possibility that the jackpot game state will occur. That is, the first holding position movement notice and the second holding position movement notice are effects suggesting that there is a possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, for the SP jackpot fluctuation and the L jackpot fluctuation, the selection rate of the second holding position movement notice is higher than the selection rate of the first holding position movement notice. The selection rate of the first holding position movement notice is higher than the selection rate of the second holding position movement notice. Therefore, in general, when the second holding position movement notice is executed than when the first holding position movement notice is executed, the jackpot game is based on the special figure variable display corresponding to the first start winning command condition is likely to occur.

Effect control microcomputer 121, when the result of the holding position movement notice determination is "first holding position movement notice" or "second holding position movement notice", indicates the determination result (holding position movement notice type) A command (holding position movement notice command) is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

In the following, when "first holding position movement notice" or "second holding position movement notice" is selected in the holding position movement notice judgment, the special figure 1 hold that is the target of the judgment is referred to as " This is referred to as "suspension of holding position movement notice object". That is, the holding position movement notice object hold is the object of the holding position movement notice object, and the holding position movement notice is positioned as an effect for the big hit determination and the special figure 1 fluctuation display related to the holding position movement notice object hold.

Production control microcomputer 121, after finishing the holding position movement notice determination, subsequently determines whether the holding change notice can be executed, and the type of special mode in the case of execution (first special mode, second special mode, third special mode state) is performed. The pending change advance notice determination is executed with reference to a hold change advance notice determination table. 65-1 to 65-3 show configuration examples of the pending change notice determination table.

As shown in Figures 65-1 to 65-3, the holding change notice determination table includes special figure fluctuation patterns, which are the result of look-ahead determination indicated by the start winning command, and judgment results of holding position movement notice determination (first holding position movement notice, second holding position movement notice, not executed). Specifically, as the hold change notice determination table, the hold change notice decision table for SP jackpot fluctuation, the hold change notice decision table for L jackpot change, the hold change notice decision table for SP loss change, and the hold change notice decision table for L loss change A reservation change advance notice determination table, a reserve change advance notice determination table for N loss fluctuation, and a hold change notice judgment table for normal loss fluctuation are provided. Furthermore, each holding change notice determination table associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern includes those associated with the holding position movement notice determination result "first holding position movement notice", and the holding position movement notice judgment result "second 2 associated with "holding position movement notice" and "not executed" as a holding position movement notice determination result.

In each pending change notice determination table, "normal mode", "first special mode", "second special mode", and "third special mode" are set as determination results. The "normal mode" as the determination result corresponds to the final display mode of the icon subject to the determination being the normal mode and the pending change notice is not executed, and the "first special mode" as the determination result is The final display mode of the icon subject to the determination is the first special mode. "Special mode" means that the final display mode of the icon subject to the determination is the second special mode, and corresponds to executing the pending change notice for changing the pending icon from the normal mode to the second special mode, and the determination result In the "third special mode", the final display mode of the icon to be determined is the third special mode, and the pending change notice is executed to change the pending icon from the normal mode to the third special mode. Yes. Each pending change notice determination table shown in FIGS. It is configured appropriately so as to have a predetermined selectivity shown in FIG. 65-3.

As shown in FIGS. 65-1 to 65-3, for SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, SP loss fluctuation, and L loss fluctuation, the holding position movement advance notice determination result is "not executed" <"first holding position In the order of "movement notice"<"second holding position movement notice", the selection rate related to the entire special mode is high. Also, for N reach fluctuation, "second holding position movement notice" is not selected, but the holding position movement notice determination result is "not executed" < "first holding position movement notice" In the order, special High selectivity across aspects. Therefore, in general, if the holding position movement notice is not executed <if the first holding position movement notice is executed <if the second holding position movement notice is executed, the possibility that the holding change notice will be executed ( expectations) are high.

Furthermore, for the SP jackpot fluctuation and the L jackpot fluctuation, the second special mode is obtained in the order of "not executed" <"first holding position movement notice" <"second holding position movement notice". , and the selectivity according to the third special mode is high. Also, regarding the SP loss variation, "not executed" and "first holding position movement notice", but "third special mode" is not selected, but in the case of "second holding position movement notice" , the "third special mode" may be selected, and the selection rate related to the second special mode is in the order of "do not execute" < "first holding position movement notice" < "second holding position movement notice" high. Also, for the L loss variation, the "third special mode" is not selected, but in the order of "do not execute" < "first holding position movement notice" < "second holding position movement notice", the second 2 High selectivity for special mode. Moreover, the second special mode and the third special mode are not selected for the N losing variation. Therefore, in general, if the holding position movement notice is not executed <if the first holding position movement notice is executed <if the second holding position movement notice is executed There is a high possibility that a pending change notice suggesting that the probability is high is executed (the pending icon changes to a display mode suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state).

Note that the fact that the holding position movement notice is not executed means that the decoration image G60, the holding icon, or the icon concerned is displayed at the normal position, and the fact that the first holding position movement notice is executed means that the decoration image G60 is displayed. , and that the holding icon or the icon is displayed at the first special position, and that the second holding position movement notice is executed means that the decorative image G60, the holding icon or the icon is displayed at the second special position It means that it will be displayed. Therefore, it is highly possible that the decoration image G60, the hold icon, and the display positions of the icon are displayed in the order of normal position<first special position<second special position, and the hold change notice is executed. In addition, the decoration image G60, the reserved icon, and the display positions of the icon are in the order of normal position<first special position<second special position, suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. It means that there is a high possibility that the pending change notice will be executed (the pending icon changes to a display mode suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state).

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, in step S4302, first, when it is determined that it is not during the special figure fluctuation display at present, performs the holding change notice determination without performing the holding position movement notice determination. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the pending change notice, as in the case where the decision result in the holding position movement notice decision is "not executed".

Effect control microcomputer 121, when the result of the suspension change notice determination is "first special mode", "second special mode", or "third special mode", in other words, the suspension change notice with the suspension change notice is determined to be executed, a command (suspension change notice command) indicating the determination result (special mode type) is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the pending change notice command in the output buffer in association with the pending effect command related to the hold icon corresponding to the special figure 1 hold, which is the object of the pending change notice determination.

In the following, when the "first special mode", "second special mode", or "third special mode" is selected in the suspension change notice determination, the special figure 1 suspension that is the target of the determination is referred to as "holding change notice target hold". That is, the hold change notice target hold is the target of the hold change notice target, and the hold change notice is positioned as an effect for the big hit determination and the special figure 1 fluctuation display related to the hold change notice target hold.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121, when the result of the pending change notice determination is the "first special mode", "second special mode", or "third special mode", the timing of executing the pending change notice ( hold change timing determination for determining hold change timing); The pending change timing determination is executed with reference to a pending change timing determination table. FIG. 66 shows a configuration example of the pending change timing determination table.

As shown in FIG. 66, the hold change timing determination table is associated with the order of hold when the hold change notice target hold occurs. Specifically, as the pending change timing determination table, a pending change timing determination table for pending order 4, a pending change timing determination table for pending order 3, a pending change timing determination table for pending order 2, and a pending change timing determination table for pending order 1 hold change timing determination table is provided.

In each pending change timing determination table, "holding order 3", "holding order 2", "holding order 1", and "pertinent variation" are set as the determination results. “Holding order 3” as a determination result represents the timing two seconds after the icon related to the pending change notice target hold (holding change notice target icon) shifts (moves) to the third area 50d3. 2” represents the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed since the icon for pending change notice was shifted (moved) to the second area 50d2, and “holding order 1” represents the icon for pending change notice shifted to the first area 50d1. The timing after two seconds have elapsed since (moving) is indicated, and the "change" indicates the timing after two seconds have elapsed since the pending change notice target icon has been shifted (moved) to the display area 50de. Each pending change timing determination table shown in FIG. 66 is appropriately set so that the selection rate for each determination result (holding order 3, holding order 2, holding order 1, the variation) becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. It is configured.

After completing the pending change timing determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a command (suspended change timing command) indicating the determination result (suspended change timing) in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 . It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the pending change timing command in the output buffer in association with the pending change notice command related to the pending change notice subject to the pending change timing determination.

The pending effect command, the pending position movement notice command, the pending change notice command, and the pending change timing command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 are transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004). It should be noted that the pending effect command, the pending position movement notice command, the pending change notice command, and the pending change timing command are set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 within the same step S4302 by the series of processes described above. Strictly speaking, the effect control microcomputer 121 first transmits the pending effect command, then transmits the pending position movement notice command, and then changes the pending change. The notice command and pending change timing command shall be transmitted in this order.

When the pending effect command is received, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 immediately responds to the pending order related to the special figure 1 pending indicated by the pending effect command in the pending display region 50d (first region 50d1, The second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4) display the hold icon in the normal mode.

Further, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the holding position movement notice command, when one second has passed since the holding icon corresponding to the holding position movement notice target holding is displayed, the holding position movement notice Execute the hold position move notice of the type indicated by the command.

Further, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the pending change notice command, the pending change notice command is displayed as the pending icon in the normal mode according to the pending effect command associated with the pending change notice command. At the timing indicated by the associated pending change timing command, the special mode indicated by the pending change notice command is changed.

Next, specific examples of holding position movement notice and holding change notice will be described. 67 to 69 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of holding position movement notice and holding change notice.

In addition, in describing specific examples of the holding position movement notice and the holding change notice, currently, as shown in FIG. Along with the variable display of EZ1 to EZ3, the icon HA0 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the suspended icon HA1 in the normal mode corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension of the suspension order 1 are displayed. Assume the situation as shown.

Also, in the situation shown in FIG. 67(A), it is assumed that there is no plan to execute the holding position movement notice and the holding change notice. In addition, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern related to the icon HA0 is reachless loss, and the special figure variation pattern related to the pending icon HA1 is reachless loss.

Then, for example, from the situation shown in FIG. 67 (A), a special figure 1 reservation with a reservation order of 2 occurs, and the look-ahead determination result related to the special figure 1 reservation is a SP jackpot fluctuation, and the occurrence of the special figure 1 reservation It is assumed that it is determined as "second holding position movement notice" in the holding position movement notice determination based on, "second special mode" in the holding change notice judgment, and "holding order 1" in the hold change timing judgment . That is, the special figure 1 hold becomes the hold position movement notice target hold. Then, first, in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 reserve of the reserve order 2, the normal mode reserve icon HA2 is displayed at the position corresponding to the reserve order 2, as shown in FIG.

Then, when two seconds have passed since the hold icon HA2 corresponding to the hold position movement notice object hold was displayed, the decoration image G60 moves to the second special position as shown in FIG. Holding position movement notice is executed. Then, the special figure 1 variable display that has been performed at the time of the situation shown in FIG. 67 (A) is completed, and as shown in FIG. is performed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 which have been displayed in a variable manner up to that point are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss without reach, and the icon HA0 is erased.

Subsequently, when the special figure 1 variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension of the reservation order 1 starts, as shown in FIG. It moves to the display area 50e (not shown) and becomes the icon HA1, and the pending icon HA2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown) and becomes the pending icon HA2 representing the pending order 1.

Here, since the result of the hold change timing determination based on the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon HA2 was "hold order 1", 2 seconds after the hold order of the special figure 1 hold became the hold order 1 , the display mode of the pending icon HA2 changes from the normal mode to the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 68(B). Then, the special figure 1 variable display that has been performed in the situation shown in FIG. 68 (A) ends, and as shown in FIG. Then, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 which have been variably displayed until then are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a no-reach loss, and the icon HA1 is erased.

Subsequently, when the special figure 1 variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension of the reservation order 1 starts, as shown in FIG. It moves to the display area 50e (not shown) and becomes the icon HA2.

After that, the look-ahead determination result of the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon HA2 was "SP jackpot change", so for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in B), when reach is established, the first holding position movement notice ends. Specifically, the decoration image G60 returns to the normal position after the reach is established until the N reach starts as shown in FIG. 69(C).

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY2, in the display unit 50a, when the pending icon or the icon (specific image) is displayed at the first special position (first display position) and at the second special position (second 2 display position), and the second special position (second display position) than when the pending icon or the icon (specific image) is displayed in the first special position (first display position) , it is possible to surprise the player and make the player pay attention to the display position of the pending icon and the icon, so that the game Increased interest. In addition, there is a normal position (normal display position) as the display position of the suspended icon and the icon (specific image), and the suspended icon and the icon (specific image) are displayed in the normal position (normal display position) Sometimes, when moving to the first special position (first display position) and when moving to the second special position (second display position), the pending icon or the icon (specific image) can be displayed. Since it is possible to suppress the monotony of the performances used, the amusement of the game is further improved. In addition, the target displayed in the first special position (first display position) or the second special position (second display position) is the special figure 1 reservation (jackpot judgment, right to execute special figure variable display) occurs Since it is an icon (suspended icon, the icon) that may be displayed at the normal position (normal display position) depending on the situation, it is possible to maintain the period during which the game interest is improved.

(Modified example of the second embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko game machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the second embodiment, the holding position movement notice and the holding change notice are executed in the normal game state and the normal production mode, but the game state in which the holding position movement notice and the holding change notice can be executed and the production mode are the second The present invention is not limited to the two embodiments, and may be changed as appropriate. Further, the holding position movement notice and the holding change notice may be made executable in a plurality of types of game states and production modes. Furthermore, based on the look-ahead determination result pertaining to the special figure 2 hold, it may be possible to execute the hold position move notice and hold change notice.

There are two types of holding position movement notice types, in other words, the special display positions of the decorative image G60, and in other words, the holding icon and the special display positions of the icons. or three or more types.

In addition, there are two types of effect contents of various holding position movement notices, in other words, the special display position of the decorative image G60, further in other words, the holding icon and the special display position of the icon, but these effect contents are particularly limited. can be changed as appropriate.

For example, as the first holding position movement notice, the decorative image G60 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise with respect to the normal mode and displayed at the left end of the display unit 50a. Both or one of the display positions may be changed as appropriate. Similarly, as the advance notice of movement of the second holding position, the decorative image G60 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees with respect to the normal mode and displayed on the right end of the display unit 50a. Both or one of the display positions in 50a may be changed as appropriate.

In both the first holding position movement notice and the second holding position movement notice, the decorative image G60, the holding display area 50d, and the display area 50e are the same size as in the normal mode, but the first Both or one of the holding position movement notice and the second holding position movement notice may be enlarged or reduced compared to the normal mode. Alternatively, the decoration image G60, the holding display area 50d, and the display area 50e are enlarged in one of the first holding position movement notice and the second holding position movement notice compared to the normal mode, and in the other, It may be reduced compared to the normal mode. It should be noted that when these enlargements and reductions are made, naturally the sizes of the icons such as the icon and the reserved icon are also enlarged or reduced accordingly.

For example, in the first holding position movement notice, the decorative image G60 is reduced to about 1/3 as a whole, but is maintained in the same horizontal direction as in the normal mode, and for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 of the display section 50a is displayed. In the second holding position movement notice, the decoration image G60 is reduced to about 1/3 as a whole, but is held in the same horizontal direction as in the normal mode. The right effect symbol EZ3 of the display section 50a may be arranged substantially in the center in the vertical direction of the displayed area. Alternatively, in the first holding position movement notice, the decorative image G60 is reduced to about 2/3 as a whole and held in a state rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise with respect to the normal mode, and the display section 50a is left-handed. The symbol EZ1 is arranged around the lower part of the display area, and in the second hold position movement notice, the decoration image G60 is reduced to about 4/5 as a whole and rotated 20 degrees counterclockwise with respect to the normal mode. It may be held in such a state that it is placed near the bottom of the area where the left effect symbol EZ1 of the display section 50a is displayed.

Further, by executing the first holding position movement notice and the second holding position movement notice, the display positions of the holding display area 50d and the display area 50e move integrally, but in this case, the decoration image The design of G60 may be changed, or the decoration image G60 may be deleted.

The holding position movement notice is executed when 1 second has passed since the holding icon corresponding to the holding position movement notice object holding is displayed, but this execution timing is not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate. good. For example, the holding position movement notice may be executed at the timing when the holding icon corresponding to the holding position movement notice target hold is displayed, or after the holding order related to the holding position movement notice target hold advances In other words, the holding position movement notice may be executed after the holding icon corresponding to the holding position movement notice object hold moves to the display area 50e side. Furthermore, a plurality of timings at which the holding position movement notice can be executed may be set.

In addition, the holding position movement notice ends when the reach is established with the special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the holding position movement notice object holding, but the end timing of the holding position movement notice is not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate. Also good. For example, when the special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the hold position move notice target hold starts, the hold position move notice ends, or the hold position move before the start of the special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the hold position move notice target hold The advance notice may end in some cases. Also, a plurality of timings for ending the holding position movement notice may be set.

There are three types of special mode types, but the number of types is not particularly limited, and may be one type, two types, or four or more types. Also, in the second embodiment, the pending icon always appears in the normal mode, but it may appear in the special mode. Furthermore, the pending change notice is a change from the normal mode to the special mode, but the pending change notice changing from the special mode to the normal mode and/or the pending change notice changing from any special mode to another special mode can be made executable. In addition, it may be possible to execute a suspension change notice in which the display mode changes multiple times during the period from when one suspension icon appears until it disappears. In this case, when the decoration image G60 is displayed at the normal position<when the decoration image G60 is displayed at the first special position (the first holding position movement notice is executed)<when the decoration image G60 is displayed at the second Display mode of the icon corresponding to the hold position move notice target hold, or the icon corresponding to another special figure 1 hold, in the order when it is displayed at the special position (the second hold position move notice is executed) It is also possible to increase the expected value of the number of times that changes.

Further, in the second embodiment, as the execution timing of the pending change notice, when two seconds have passed since the pending change notice target icon was shifted (moved) to the third area 50d3, the pending change notice target icon moved to the second area. When 2 seconds have passed since the shift (movement) to 50d2, when 2 seconds have passed since the pending change notice target icon has been shifted (moved) to the first area 50d1, and when the pending change notice target icon is displayed Although it is set when two seconds have passed since the shift (movement) to the area 50e, the execution timing of the pending change notice can be set as appropriate, and all or part of these can be added or replaced. , may be set as appropriate.

As a pre-reading effect based on the pre-reading determination result related to the special figure 1 reserve, the decoration image G60, in other words, the holding position movement notice that the display position of the icon such as the holding icon or the icon is moved is executed, but the target of the display position is The decoration image G60, in other words, the suspended icon or the icon may be changed to another image. For example, as the look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead determination result related to the special figure 1 hold, it may be possible to execute the effect that the display position of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, or another specific image moves. In this case, a plurality of effect types of the look-ahead effect may be set according to different display positions. Further, as in the example of changing the holding position movement notice described above, the size and orientation of the target image may be changed when the pre-reading effect is executed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as a third embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko game machine PY3 according to the third embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation effect in the normal game state and the normal effect mode, in addition to the effect flow configuration effect such as reach and various reach effects, A special mode effect suggesting that there is a possibility of entering a game state, in other words, a special mode effect that increases the chances of entering a game state that is advantageous to the player may be executed. Special mode production can be executed in normal fluctuation of special figure fluctuation production.

Although a specific example will be described later, in the special mode effect, a background image dedicated to the special mode effect (background image for special mode effect) G117 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. Although detailed description is omitted, the special mode effect background image G117 is composed of a 2D animation having a predetermined story. Also, the special mode effect is executed in the normal variation, which is the effect flow configuration effect.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an effect flow relating to a special mode effect. As shown in FIG. 70, in the special mode effect, first, a special mode effect opening notification effect for notifying that the special mode effect has started is executed, and then 3, which is the central position of the special mode effect, is executed. A unit performance is executed for one time, then a comprehensive performance for summarizing the three unit performances is executed, and finally, a special mode performance end notification performance for notifying the end of the special mode performance is executed.

In each unit production, first, a chance-up type suggestion production that suggests the type of chance-up production (chance-up type) is executed, and then the chance-up production is executed. The chance-up production is a production that raises the expectation of the jackpot gaming state by being executed (increases the chance).

A first chance-up effect, a second chance-up effect, and a third chance-up effect are set as the chance-up types. The first chance-up effect consists of an effect (cut-in effect) in which a cut-in is performed on the display unit 50a, and the second chance-up effect is an effect (group The third chance up effect is composed of a effect (frame lamp flash) in which the frame lamp 53 emits light in a specific mode. Therefore, the chance-up type suggesting effect (first chance-up type suggesting effect) of the first chance-up effect is a effect suggesting that the cut-in effect is executed, and the chance-up type suggesting effect of the second chance-up effect. (Second chance-up type suggestive effect) is a effect that suggests that a cross-group effect is executed, and the chance-up type suggestive effect (third chance-up type suggestive effect) of the third chance-up effect is a frame lamp. This is an effect suggesting that a flash will be executed.

In the first chance-up effect, three types of effect modes (first chance-up effect mode) of a first effect mode A, a first effect mode B, and a first effect mode C are set. For the second chance-up effect, three types of effect modes (second chance-up effect mode) of a second effect mode A, a second effect mode B, and a second effect mode C are set. Similarly, for the third chance-up effect, three types of effect modes (third chance-up effect mode) of a third effect mode A, a third effect mode B, and a third effect mode C are set.

The first chance-up effect mode, the second chance-up effect mode, and the third chance-up effect mode are associated with the degree of expectation for the jackpot gaming state suggested by the effect mode. As for the first chance-up effect mode, there is a high expectation that the jackpot game state will occur in the order of first effect mode A<first effect mode B<first effect mode C. As for the second chance-up effect mode, the degree of expectation for the big winning game state is high in the order of the second effect mode A<second effect mode B<second effect mode C. As for the third chance-up effect mode, the degree of expectation for the big winning game state is high in the order of the third effect mode A<the third effect mode B<the third effect mode C.

The type of the first chance-up effect mode is associated with the color of the image (cut-in effect image) G61 used in the cut-in effect. The first effect mode A is associated with green, the first effect mode B is associated with red, and the first effect mode C is associated with gold. The type of the second chance-up effect mode is associated with the number of groups of baseballs forming the image (group-crossing effect image) G62 used in the group-crossing effect. The second effect mode A is associated with 5, the second effect mode B is associated with 15, and the second effect mode C is associated with 30. The type of the third chance-up effect mode is associated with the emission color of the frame lamp 53 that emits light with frame lamp flash. The third effect mode A is associated with green, the third effect mode B is associated with red, and the third effect mode C is associated with rainbow.

Next, the promotion of the chance-up effect will be explained. As described above, the number of times the chance-up effect can be executed throughout the special mode effect is three times. Then, there are a time when the first chance-up performance is executed, a time when the second chance-up performance is executed, and a time when the third chance-up performance is executed in any order of the unit performance. Therefore, in the special mode production, when each of the first chance-up production, the second chance-up production, and the third chance-up production is executed once, the first chance-up production is executed twice, and the second chance production is executed twice. When the up effect is executed once, when the first chance up effect is executed twice, and when the third chance up effect is executed once, the second chance up effect is executed twice, and the first chance up effect is executed once. a case where the second chance-up performance is executed twice, a case where the third chance-up performance is executed once, and a third chance-up performance is executed twice and the first chance-up performance is executed once. a case where the third chance-up effect is executed twice and a second chance-up effect is executed once; a case where the first chance-up effect is executed three times; and a case where the second chance-up effect is executed three times. There are cases where the third chance-up effect is executed three times.

In the pachinko game machine PY3, when the chance-up effect of the same type is executed a plurality of times in the special mode effect, the chance-up effect mode is suggested as the order of the unit effect increases (the chance-up effect mode is The chance-up performance mode may change so that the degree of expectation for a jackpot gaming state (associated with the player) increases. In other words, throughout the special mode production, the chance-up production mode changes so that the degree of expectation for the jackpot gaming state increases. The change of the chance-up effect mode so as to increase the expectation of the jackpot game state is called "upgrade of the chance-up effect".

In addition, it is executed by the display unit 50a, and is configured by displaying an image (overall effect image) G64 associated with the overall effect. Three types of performance modes (general performance mode) of a fourth performance mode A, a fourth performance mode B, and a fourth performance mode C are set for the overall performance. The general effect mode is associated with the degree of expectation for the jackpot game state suggested by the effect mode. As for the overall effect mode, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state will occur in the order of fourth effect mode A<fourth effect mode B<fourth effect mode C is high.

Although a specific example will be described later, the overall effect image G64 is composed of a predetermined speech of a female teacher character. The type of general effect is associated with the content of the lines forming the general effect image G64. The fourth presentation mode A is the line "If you sum it up in one word, it's normal." ”.

Also, in the third embodiment, the effect time of the special mode effect (special mode effect time) is set to 11 seconds. Specifically, the effect time of the special mode effect start suggesting effect is 0.5 seconds, the effect time of each unit effect is 3 seconds, the general effect effect is 1 second, and the special mode effect end suggesting effect. is 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, when the special mode production is executed, the special mode production starts when 1 second has passed since the special figure fluctuation production (normal fluctuation) started, and the special mode production ends during the normal fluctuation. do.

Next, an example of the contents of control related to the special mode effect will be described. It should be noted that the control content described below is an example of the control content related to the special mode effect, and therefore the control content is not limited to the following content and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, the production control microcomputer 121, in step S4306, when the normal game state and the normal production mode, after determining the special figure fluctuation production pattern, based on the special figure fluctuation start command, the special mode production A special mode effect execution determination is performed to determine whether or not execution is possible.

The special mode effect execution determination is executed with reference to a special mode effect execution determination table. A configuration example of the special mode effect execution determination table is shown in FIG. 71(A). As shown in FIG. 71(A), the special mode effect execution determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern. Specifically, as a special mode effect execution determination table, a special mode effect execution determination table for SP jackpot variation, a special mode effect execution determination table for L jackpot change, a special mode effect execution determination table for SP loss change, L A special mode effect execution determination table for loss variation, a special mode effect execution determination table for N loss variation, a special mode effect execution determination table for normal A loss change, a special mode effect execution determination table for normal B loss change, and A special mode effect execution determination table for normal C loss variation is provided. Each special mode effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 71(A) is configured appropriately so that the selection rate for execution/non-execution of the special mode effect is the predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 71(A). there is

As shown in FIG. 71(A), "execute" may be selected both in the case of a big winning variation and in the case of a losing variation. Therefore, when the special mode effect is executed, there is a possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special mode effect is an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state. Also, in the case of special figure fluctuation reach is established, it may be selected as "execute", but in the case of special figure fluctuation reach is not established, it is not selected as "executed". Therefore, when the special mode effect is executed, reach is always established. That is, the special mode effect is a effect suggesting reach.

When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the special mode production is executed in the special mode production execution determination, the production mode related to the three chance-up productions in the special mode production is continued based on the special figure fluctuation start command. Chance-up scenario determination is performed to determine a scenario (chance-up scenario) representing the content of change.

Chance-up scenarios that can be determined by chance-up scenario determination include scenario 1 (sc1), scenario 2 (sc2), scenario 3 (sc3), scenario 4 (sc4), and scenario 5 (sc5).

In Scenario 1, in the first unit production, a chance-up production of a certain chance-up type is executed in production mode A (1A), and in the second unit production, the chance-up production of the same chance-up type is produced. It is executed in the mode B (1B), and in the third unit performance, the chance-up effect of the same chance-up type is executed in the effect mode C (1C).

In Scenario 2, in the first unit production, a chance-up production of a certain chance-up type is executed in production mode A (1A), and in the second unit production, the chance-up production of the same chance-up type is produced. It is executed in the mode B (1B), and in the third unit performance, a chance-up effect of another chance-up type is executed in the effect mode A (2A).

In Scenario 3, in the first unit production, a chance-up production of a certain chance-up type is executed in production mode A (1A), and in the second unit production, a chance-up production of another chance-up type is produced. It is executed in mode A (2A), and in the third unit performance, the chance-up effect of the first chance-up type is executed in mode B (1B).

In Scenario 4, in the first unit production, a chance-up production of a certain chance-up type is executed in production mode A (1A), and in the second unit production, a chance-up production of another chance-up type is produced. It is executed in mode A (2A), and in the third unit performance, the chance-up effect of the second chance-up type is executed in mode B (2B).

In Scenario 5, in the first unit production, a chance-up production of a certain chance-up type is executed in production mode A (1A), and in the second unit production, a chance-up production of another chance-up type is produced. It is executed in the mode A (2A), and in the third unit performance, the chance-up performance of the chance-up type different from the first or second time is executed in the performance mode A (3A).

Thus, in scenario 1, a certain type of chance-up effect is executed three times, and the effect mode is finally changed (promoted) to effect mode C, and in scenario 2, scenario 3, and scenario 4, the processes are mutually However, a certain type of chance-up effect is executed twice, and the effect mode is finally changed (promoted) to the effect mode B, and in scenario 5, each type of chance-up effect is executed once, and the effect mode is is never changed (promoted).

Chance-up scenario determination is executed with reference to a chance-up scenario determination table. FIG. 71B shows a configuration example of the chance-up scenario determination table. As shown in FIG. 71(B), the chance up scenario determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern. Specifically, as the chance-up scenario determination table, the chance-up scenario determination table for SP jackpot variation, the chance-up scenario determination table for L jackpot variation, the chance-up scenario determination table for SP loss variation, and the chance-up scenario determination table for L loss variation A chance-up scenario determination table and a chance-up scenario determination table for N loss variation are provided. Each chance-up scenario determination table shown in FIG. 71(B) is configured appropriately so that the selection rate for each chance-up scenario is the predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 71(B).

As shown in FIG. 71(B), regarding the SP jackpot variation and the L jackpot variation, the selection rate for scenario 1 is the highest and the selection rate for scenario 5 is the lowest. Moreover, the ratio of the selection rate of scenario 1 to the selection rate of scenario 5 is considerably high. In addition, for the SP loss variation, the selection rate for scenario 1 and the selection rate for scenario 5 are almost the same, and for the L loss variation, the selection rate for scenario 5 is the highest and the selection rate for scenario 1 is the lowest. . Furthermore, with respect to the N loss variation, the selectivity of scenario 1 is "0" and the selectivity of scenario 5 is the highest. Also, regarding the SP jackpot variation and the L jackpot variation, the selectivity of each of Scenarios 2 to 4 is higher than Scenario 5 and lower than Scenario 1. Furthermore, the selectivity of each of Scenarios 2 to 4 is higher than that of Scenario 1 and Scenario 5 for the SP loss variation. In addition, the selectivity of each of Scenarios 2 to 4 is higher than that of Scenario 1 and lower than that of Scenario 5 for the L-loss variation. According to the above and the selection rate shown in FIG. 71(B), when scenario 1 is selected, the degree of expectation for shifting to the jackpot game state is the highest, and when scenario 5 is selected, the jackpot game state is expected. least likely to migrate to In other words, if the production mode changes (promotes) to production mode C in the special mode production > If the production mode changes (promotes) to production mode B > If the production mode changes (promotes) to production mode B or production mode C ), it can be said that there is a high possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state in the order of not doing so.

After completing the chance-up scenario determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 continues to select the chance-up type for determining the chance-up type constituting the chance-up scenario based on the special figure variation start command and the chance-up scenario determination result. Perform pattern judgment. Chance-up type pattern determination is determined for each chance-up scenario.

In Scenario 1, the same type of chance-up effect is executed three times, and the effect mode changes (promotes) in the order of "effect mode A → effect mode B → effect mode C", but the effect control microcomputer 121 If scenario 1 is determined in the chance-up scenario determination, in the chance-up type pattern determination, the target chance-up type is any of the first chance-up effect, the second chance-up effect, or the third chance-up effect. to decide.

In Scenario 2, Scenario 3, and Scenario 4, a certain type of chance-up effect is executed twice, and another type of chance-up effect is executed once. B", but the effect control microcomputer 121, when the scenario 2 to scenario 4 is determined in the chance-up scenario determination, the chance-up type pattern determination, the target chance-up type of these two times. and the type of chance-up for one time are determined to be any of the first chance-up performance, the second chance-up performance, or the third chance-up performance.

In scenario 5, chance-up effects of all types are executed once each in the effect mode A, but the effect control microcomputer 121 performs chance-up type pattern determination when scenario 5 is determined in the chance-up scenario determination. and decide in what order they will be executed.

Chance-up type pattern determination is executed with reference to a chance-up type pattern determination table. 72 and 73 show configuration examples of the chance-up type pattern determination table. As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the chance-up type pattern determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern and the chance-up scenario determination result. Specifically, as the chance-up type pattern determination table, the chance-up type pattern determination table for SP big hit variation, the chance-up type pattern determination table for L jackpot variation, the chance-up type pattern determination table for SP loss variation, L A chance-up type pattern determination table for loss variation and a chance-up type pattern determination table for N-loss variation are provided. Further, the chance-up type pattern determination tables other than those for the N-loss variation include those for scenario 1, those for scenarios 2 to 4, and those for scenario 5. FIG. On the other hand, the chance-up type pattern determination table for the N-loss variation further includes one for scenarios 2 to 4 and one for scenario 5. FIG. Each chance-up type pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 72 to 73 is configured appropriately so that the selection rate for each chance-up type pattern (type P) is the predetermined selection rate shown in FIGS. 72 to 73. ing. The "first", "second", and "third" described in the remarks of each chance-up type pattern determination table are respectively "first chance-up effect", "second chance-up effect", and " It means "third chance up production".

As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, for Scenario 1, the third chance effect is most likely to be selected for the big win variation, and the third chance up effect is the least likely to be selected for the losing variation. Therefore, when scenario 1 is executed with the third chance-up effect, the possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state is the highest. Conversely, for Scenario 1, the first chance effect is the least likely to be selected for the big win variation, and the first chance up effect is the most likely to be selected for the loss variation. Therefore, when scenario 1 is executed with the first chance-up effect, the possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state is the lowest.

As for Scenario 2, execution of the third chance effect twice is most likely to be selected for the big win variation, and execution of the third chance up effect twice is least likely to be selected for the loss variation. Therefore, when scenario 2 is executed by executing the third chance-up effect twice, the possibility of transition to the jackpot game state is the highest. Conversely, for Scenario 2, it is the least likely to select execution of the first chance effect twice for the big win variation, and it is most likely to select the execution of the first chance up effect twice for the loss variation. Therefore, when scenario 1 is executed by executing the first chance-up effect twice, the possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state is the lowest.

After finishing the chance-up type pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs overall effect mode determination for determining the overall effect mode based on the chance-up scenario determination result. The general effect mode determination is executed with reference to a general effect mode determination table. FIG. 74 shows an example of the configuration of the general effect mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 74, the general effect mode determination table is associated with the chance up scenario. Specifically, as the general effect mode determination table, a general effect mode determination table for scenario 1, a general effect mode determination table for scenarios 2 to 4, and a general effect mode determination table for scenario 5 are provided. . Each general effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 74 is configured appropriately so that the selection rate for each general effect mode is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74, for scenario 1, the fourth production mode C "dialogue: if you sum it up in one word, you are excellent" is selected with a probability of 100%, and for scenarios 2 to 4, a probability of 100% is selected. With a probability, the fourth production mode B, "Dialogue: Summarizing in one word, it's good, isn't it?" ” will be selected. That is, the overall effect mode is associated with the chance-up scenario.

Then, when the production control microcomputer 121 finishes the general production mode determination, a command indicating the result of the chance-up scenario determination (chance-up scenario command), a command indicating the chance-up type pattern determination result (chance-up type pattern command), and A command indicating a general effect mode (general effect mode command) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and data indicating the chance up scenario determination result (chance up scenario data), data indicating the chance up type pattern determination result (chance up type pattern data) and data indicating the result of general effect mode determination (general effect mode data) are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for effect.

The chance-up scenario command, chance-up type pattern command, and overall effect mode command set in the output buffer are transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004). When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the chance up scenario command, the chance up type pattern command, and the general effect mode command, in the special figure variation effect, the chance up scenario command, the chance up type pattern command, and the general effect A special mode effect is executed according to the contents indicated by the effect mode command.

Also, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes a special mode effect according to the contents indicated by the chance-up scenario data, the chance-up type pattern data, and the general effect mode data.

Next, a specific example of the special mode effect will be described. 75 to 79 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of special mode effects. 75 to 79, the display section 50a and the frame lamp 53 are extracted and schematically shown. Also, here, it is assumed that a unit effect composed of scenario 5 and type P32 is executed. That is, in the first unit production, the first chance-up production (cut-in production) of the first production mode A is executed, and in the second unit production, the third chance-up production (frame lamp) of the third production mode A is executed. Flash) is executed, and the second chance-up effect (cross-group effect) of the second effect mode A is executed in the third unit effect. Furthermore, it is assumed that the general effect is executed in the fourth effect mode A.

As shown in FIG. 75(A), when 1 second elapses after the special figure fluctuation effect, in other words, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, the special mode effect starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a special mode effect background image G117 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. When the special mode effect starts, first, a special mode effect start suggesting effect is executed in the special mode effect background image G117. As for the display contents of the effect suggesting the start of the special mode effect, for example, as shown in FIG. A character image is displayed as if it is uttering a line "Let's start the chance-up class" suggesting that the chance-up production that constitutes it will start. Incidentally, in the third embodiment, the effect contents of the special mode start suggesting effect are set to be the same regardless of the effect contents of the unit effect and the general effect to be performed thereafter.

In the special mode effect, when the special mode effect start suggesting effect is executed, the first unit effect is started next. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(A), as the first chance-up type suggestion effect, the first chance-up effect (cut-in effect) is executed in the special mode effect background image G117. Then, as shown in FIG. 76(B), as the first chance-up effect, the special mode effect background image G117 is displayed as the first effect. A cut-in effect image G61 of mode A is displayed. When the second chance-up effect (cross-group effect) is executed as the first chance-up effect, the second chance-up effect is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the first chance-up effect suggestive effect. When the phrase "First period, group notice" is displayed to indicate that the effect (group crossing effect) will be executed, and the third chance up effect (frame lamp flash) is executed, the first chance up It is assumed that, as the type-indicating effect, the phrase "frame flash in the first period" indicating execution of the third chance-up effect (frame lamp flash) is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117. . Also, the "first period" included in the phrase relating to the first chance-up type suggesting effect corresponds to the order of the unit effect "first time".

When the first unit performance ends, the second unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(A), as the second chance-up type suggestion effect, the third chance-up effect (frame lamp flash) is executed in the special mode effect background image G117. Then, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the frame lamp 53 emits light in the third effect mode A as the second chance-up effect. , an effect image G63 corresponding to the light emission of the frame lamp 53 in the third effect mode A is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117. When the first chance-up effect (cut-in effect) is executed as the second chance-up effect, the first chance-up effect is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the second chance-up type suggestion effect. A phrase indicating that the effect (cut-in effect) will be executed is displayed, and if the second chance-up effect (cross-group effect) is executed, the second chance will be displayed. As the effect suggesting the type of upgrade, the background image G117 for the special mode effect displays the phrase "In the second period, the group notice is given" indicating that the second chance-up effect (group crossing effect) will be executed. do. In addition, the "second period" included in the phrase relating to the second chance-up type suggesting effect corresponds to the order of the unit effect "second time".

When the second unit performance ends, the third unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78(A), as the third chance-up type suggestion effect, the second chance-up effect (cross-group effect) is executed in the special mode effect background image G117. Then, as shown in FIG. 78B, as the third chance-up effect, the background image for special mode effect G117 is displayed in the second effect mode. A cross-group effect image G62 is displayed. Note that when the first chance-up effect (cut-in effect) is executed as the third chance-up effect, the first chance-up effect is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the third chance-up type suggestion effect. A phrase indicating that the effect (cut-in effect) will be executed is displayed, and when the third chance-up effect (frame lamp flash) is executed, the third chance is displayed. As an effect suggesting the type of upgrade, the background image G117 for special mode effect displays the phrase "The third period is a frame flash" indicating that the third chance-up effect (frame lamp flash) will be executed do. In addition, "3rd period" included in the phrase relating to the third chance-up type suggestive effect corresponds to the order "3rd time" of the unit effect.

When the third unit performance ends, the general performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79A, as a general effect, a predetermined female teacher character appears in the special mode effect background image G117, and a general effect image G64 of the fourth effect mode A is displayed. be done. Here, if the general effect is executed in the fourth effect mode B, the display content of the general effect image G64 will be the characters representing the dialogue associated with the fourth effect mode B, and when the general effect is executed in the fourth effect mode C, the display content of the general effect image G64 is the characters representing the dialogue associated with the fourth effect mode C, Excellent.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79(B), as shown in FIG. 79(C),

Next, a specific example of the special mode effect when the unit effect composed of the scenario 3 and the type P22 is executed and the general effect of the fourth effect mode B is executed will be described. That is, in the first unit production, the first chance-up production (cut-in production) of the first production mode A is executed, and in the second unit production, the third chance-up production (frame lamp) of the third production mode A is executed. Flash) is executed, and the first chance-up effect (cut-in effect) of the first effect mode B is executed in the third unit effect. Note that the contents of the special mode effect start suggesting effect, the first unit effect, and the second unit effect are the same as those in the previous specific example (FIGS. 75 to 77), so illustration here is omitted.

When the second unit performance ends, the third unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(A), as the third chance-up type suggestion effect, the first chance-up effect (cut-in effect) is executed in the special mode effect background image G117. Then, as shown in FIG. 80B, as the third chance-up effect, the first effect is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117. A cut-in effect image G61 of mode B is displayed.

When the third unit performance ends, the overall performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(C), as a general effect, a predetermined female teacher character appears in the special mode effect background image G117, and a general effect image G64 of the fourth effect mode B is displayed. be done. When the general effect is finished, after that, the effect suggesting the end of the special mode effect is executed as in the previous specific example, and then the special mode effect ends (FIGS. 79(B) to 79(C)).

Next, a specific example of the special mode effect when the unit effect composed of the scenario 1 and the type P13 is executed and the general effect of the fourth effect mode C is executed will be described. That is, in the first unit production, the second chance-up production (cross-group production) of the second production mode A is executed, and in the second unit production, the second chance-up production (cross-group production) of the second production mode B is executed. effect) is executed, and in the third unit effect, the second chance-up effect (cross-group effect) of the second effect mode C is executed. Note that the contents of the effect suggesting the start of the special mode effect are the same as those in the previous specific example (FIG. 75), so illustration here is omitted.

When the effect suggesting the start of the special mode effect ends, the first unit effect starts next. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(A), as the first chance-up type suggestion effect, the second chance-up effect (cross-group effect) is executed in the special mode effect background image G117. Then, as shown in FIG. 81(B), as the first chance-up effect, the special mode effect background image G117 is displayed in the second effect mode. A cross-group effect image G62 is displayed.

When the first unit performance ends, the second unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(C), as the second chance-up type suggestion effect, the second chance-up effect (cross-group effect) is executed in the special mode effect background image G117. Then, as shown in FIG. 81(D), as a second chance-up effect, a special mode effect background image G117 is displayed in a second effect mode. A B cross-group effect image G62 is displayed.

When the second unit performance ends, the third unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(E), as the third chance-up type suggestion effect, the second chance-up effect (cross-group effect) is executed in the special mode effect background image G117. Then, as shown in FIG. 81(F), as the third chance-up effect, the special mode effect background image G117 is displayed in the second effect mode. C cross-group effect image G62 is displayed.

When the third unit performance ends, the general performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(G), as a general effect, a predetermined female teacher character appears in the special mode effect background image G117, and a general effect image G64 of the fourth effect mode C is displayed. be done. When the general effect is finished, after that, the effect suggesting the end of the special mode effect is executed as in the previous specific example, and then the special mode effect ends (FIGS. 79(B) to 79(C)).

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY3, there is a case where a special mode effect (specific effect) that suggests the possibility of entering a jackpot game state (advantageous game state) may be executed. production), multiple types of specific production (cut-in production, cross-group production, frame lamp flash: unit production) can be executed continuously three times (N times), and the same type of specific production (cut-in production , group crossing effect, frame lamp flash: unit effect) is executed three times (N times) than when it is executed twice (N-1 times). Since there is a high possibility of becoming, the special mode performance (specific performance) can be sharpened while paying attention to the number of executions of each kind of specific performance (unit performance), thereby improving the game interest. In addition, the specific production (unit production) includes the first specific production (cut-in production: first unit production) and the second specific production (cross-group production: second unit production), and special mode production (specific production ), the first specific effect (first unit effect), or Pay attention to the type of specific effect (unit effect) because there is a high possibility that the jackpot game state (advantageous game state) occurs when only one of the second specific effects (second unit effects) is executed alone. Since the special mode performance (specific performance) can be sharpened while allowing the game to be played, the interest in the game is further improved. Furthermore, the specific effects (unit effects) include a first specific effect (cut-in effect: first unit effect) and a second specific effect (cross-group effect: second unit effect), and a special mode effect (specific effect ), the second specific effect (cross-group effect: second unit effect) is performed three times (N times) is executed, the possibility of entering a jackpot game state (advantageous game state) is high, so that attention can be paid to the type of the specific performance (unit performance), thereby further improving the game interest. .

(Modified example of the third embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment will be described. It should be noted that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the third embodiment, the special mode effect is executed in the normal game state and the normal effect mode, but the game state in which the special mode effect can be executed and the effect mode are not limited to the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. good. Also, the special mode effect may be executable in a plurality of types of game states and effect modes. Furthermore, in the special figure fluctuation production according to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, the special mode production may be made executable.

The special mode effect is started when one second has passed since the special figure variation effect started, but this execution timing is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, a plurality of timings at which the special mode effect can be executed may be set. Also, the effect time of the special mode effect may be changed as appropriate.

There are three types of chance-up effects, but the number of types is not particularly limited, and may be two types or four types or more. Also, although there are three types of effect modes for each chance-up effect, the number of these effect modes is not particularly limited, and may be two types or four types or more. Furthermore, the number of effect modes may differ depending on the chance-up effect type.

In one special mode effect, the unit effect is executed three times, but the number of times of execution is not particularly limited, and may be two times or four times or more. Also, for example, the number of executions of the unit performance in one special mode performance may be selected from a plurality. In this case, as the number of times of execution increases, the possibility of promotion to a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for shifting to the jackpot game state and/or the degree of expectation for shifting to the jackpot game state may increase.

Although the performance mode of the overall performance is associated with the chance-up scenario, it is not completely associated with the chance-up scenario, and any overall performance mode may be determined for each chance-up scenario. You can let it be. However, for example, in the case of scenario 1, the selection rate is high in the order of fourth effect mode C>fourth effect mode B>fourth effect mode A, and in the case of scenario 5, the fourth effect mode A>fourth effect There may be a relationship between the selection rate of the overall presentation mode and the chance-up scenario, such as the selection rate increasing in the order of mode B>fourth presentation mode C. In addition, in the special mode performance, there are times when the general performance is executed and times when the general performance is not executed, and the possibility of entering the jackpot game state is higher when the general performance is executed. . Furthermore, in the special mode effect, the overall effect may be configured not to be executed.

In the special mode performance, when each chance-up performance mode is promoted, the performance mode is promoted one by one from the performance mode A to the performance mode B and from the performance mode B to the performance mode C, but the performance mode is promoted by a plurality of stages such as the performance mode A to the performance mode C. It's okay to let things happen. In addition, when the chance-up effect type is executed for the first time in the special mode effect, it is executed in the effect mode A, but it may be executed in the effect mode B or the effect mode C. .

The type of the first chance-up effect mode is associated with the color of the cut-in effect image G61, the type of the second chance-up effect mode is associated with the number of baseball balls forming the cross-group effect image G62, and the third The type of chance-up effect mode is associated with the luminescent color of the frame lamp 53, but the elements constituting the effect associated with each type of effect mode may be changed as appropriate.

The first chance-up production (cut-in production), the second chance-up production (cross-group production), and the third chance-up production (frame lamp flash) that make up the special mode production are different from the special mode production. It may be so arranged that it may be executed.

Furthermore, the first chance-up performance mode, the second chance-up performance mode, and the third chance-up performance mode suggest the degree of expectation for the jackpot gaming state, but the suggested content is limited to the expectation for the jackpot gaming state. It may be changed as appropriate. For example, all or part of the first chance-up effect mode, the second chance-up effect mode, and the third chance-up effect mode are specific effects such as effects suggesting that the expectation of the jackpot gaming state is high. is executed, the degree of expectation that a specific jackpot game that can acquire a relatively large number of game balls is executed, or a game state that is advantageous to the player such as a high probability state or a time saving state after the jackpot game state You may make it suggest the expectation degree which becomes.

In the above example, the first chance-up effect is composed of a cut-in effect, the second chance-up effect is composed of a cross-group effect, and the third chance-up effect is composed of a frame lamp flash, The production contents of the chance-up production are not limited to these, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the chance-up effect may be configured by changing the display mode of the pending icon or changing the display mode of the icon. In this case, after the chance-up type suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the pending icon or the icon may be changed as the chance-up effect. Furthermore, when the chance-up effect is performed on the display unit 50a, the element of the effect associated with the chance-up effect mode is not limited to the color, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the chance-up effect mode may be associated with the size of the image, the display position of the image, or the type (shape) of the character represented by the image. Furthermore, the chance-up effect may be configured by operating the board movable body 55k. In this case, the chance-up effect mode may be associated with the moving distance of the board movable body 55k or the operation mode. Alternatively, the chance-up effect may be configured by outputting sound from the speaker 52. - 特許庁In this case, the chance-up effect mode may be associated with the volume or the type of sound.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as a fourth embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment includes a cross button 40k as operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to the first effect button 41k and the second effect button 42k. FIG. 82 is a partially enlarged plan view of the vicinity of the upper plate 34. FIG. As shown in FIG. 82, the cross button 40k is provided in the vicinity of the left side of the first effect button 41k on the upper surface of the upper plate 34, and is configured to be able to be pressed like the first effect button 41k.

The cross-shaped button 40k is formed in a substantially cross shape, and is divided into upper, lower, left, and right sides as a whole. It has a right operation section 40kr and a left operation section 40kl located on the left side, and each of the operation sections 40ku, 40kd, 40kr, and 40kl constituting the cross button 40k can be independently pressed. In the following description, the upper operation portion 40ku and the lower operation portion 40kd of the cross button 40k are collectively referred to as "up/down button 40k1", and the right operation portion 40kr and left operation portion 40kl of the cross button 40k are collectively referred to as "left and right operation portions." button 40k2”.

Moreover, the cross button 40k is connected to a cross button sensor 40a that detects the operation of the cross button 40k. The cross button 40k and the cross button sensor 40a are integrally formed, and the combination of the cross button 40k and the cross button sensor 40a is called the "cross button device 40".

Next, the electrical configuration of the effect control board 120 side in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the effect control board 120 side in the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the cross button sensor 40a is connected to the effect control board 120 in the same manner as the first effect button sensor 41a and the second effect button sensor 42a. The cross button sensor 40a detects which portion of the cross button 40k, specifically which of the upper operation section 40ku, the lower operation section 40kd, the right operation section 40kr, and the left operation section 40kl is pressed. It is possible. In other words, the cross button sensor 40a includes an upper operation section sensor 40au for detecting an operation on the upper operation section 40ku, a lower operation section sensor 40ad for detecting an operation on the lower operation section 40kd, and an operation on the right operation section 40kr. and a left operating unit sensor 40al for detecting an operation to the left operating unit 40kl.

When each operation unit sensor 40au, 40ad, 40ar, 40al detects an operation to each operation unit 40ku, 40kd, 40kr, 40kl, a signal (upper operation unit A detection signal, a lower operation part detection signal, a right operation part detection signal, a left operation part detection signal) is output to the effect control board 120 . In the following description, the upper operation part sensor 40au and the lower operation part sensor 40ad of the cross button sensor 40a are collectively referred to as "upper and lower button sensors 40a1", and the right operation part sensor 40ar and the left operation part sensor of the cross button 40k. 40al are collectively referred to as "left and right button sensors 40a2".

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY4 is configured so that the player can arbitrarily set (customize) specific items related to effects, although the details will be described later. In the pachinko game machine PY4, there are five specific items related to customizable effects: premier-up mode, one-shot announcement, auto button, 3D, and look-ahead chance. Hereinafter, these specific items related to customizable effects may be referred to as “specific effects”. In addition, "premier up mode", "one-shot announcement", "auto button", "3D", and "forecast chance" are respectively "first effect specific matter", "second effect specific matter", " They may also be referred to as "third effect specific matter", "fourth effect specific matter", and "fifth effect specific matter". It should be noted that the fact that the player can arbitrarily set each effect specific item is sometimes referred to as a "custom function".

The setting and control of the performance specific items are mainly performed by the performance control microcomputer 121 . For this purpose, the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 is provided with an effect specific item storage section 128 for storing information on effect specific items. The effect specific item storage unit 128 includes a first specific item storage unit 128a that stores information regarding the first effect specific item, a second specific item storage unit 128b that stores information regarding the second effect specific item, and a third specific item storage unit 128b that stores information regarding the second effect specific item. A third specified item storage unit 128c for storing information regarding the specified effect item, a fourth specified item storage unit 128d for storing information regarding the fourth specified item for effect, and a fifth specified item for storing information regarding the fifth specified item for effect. and a storage unit 128e.

Next, the custom function of the pachinko game machine PY4 will be described.

The "premium-up mode" constituting the first effect specific item is a mode in which the appearance frequency of the premium effect that can be executed in the pachinko game machine PY4 is increased. Here, a detailed description of the premium effect is omitted, but among the effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine PY4, a plurality of types of premium effects suggesting a high possibility of a jackpot game state are set. It is assumed that there is Basically, in other words, as a default state, the appearance rate of premium effects is set to be extremely low (for example, less than 5%) in the pachinko machine PY4, and the premium up mode is set to ON (enabled) by the custom function. ), it is possible to improve the appearance rate of the premium effect.

The ``one-shot notification'' that constitutes the second effect specific matter can be executed during the special figure fluctuation effect when the big hit is determined, and notifies the big hit such as the so-called ``P hula''. It's about performance. Here, a specific description of the one-shot announcement is omitted, but basically, in other words, the default state is set so that the one-shot announcement may be executed in the pachinko game machine PY4. However, by setting the one-shot notification to OFF (disabling) using the custom function, it is possible to prevent the one-shot notification from being executed.

The "auto button" that constitutes the third effect specific item is an operation promotion effect for various operation contents such as normal single hit operation, repeated hits, and long press for the first effect button 41k and the second effect button 42k. A mode in which an operation result effect is executed even though the operation means (the first effect button 41k, the second effect button 42k) to be operated for the operation promotion effect is not operated during execution. is. Here, the specific description of the auto button is omitted, but basically, in other words, the auto button is not set as the default state, but the auto button is set to ON (enabled) by the custom function. As a result, when the operation promotion effect is being executed, the operation result effect can be executed even if the first effect button 41k or the second effect button 42k is not operated as indicated by the operation promotion effect. can.

"3D", which constitutes the fourth arbitrary setting item for rendering, is a mode in which a 3D image can be viewed with the naked eye. Although the detailed description of the image display device 50 is omitted here, it is assumed that the image display device 50 according to the fourth embodiment is composed of a liquid crystal monitor compatible with naked-eye 3D stereoscopic viewing. Although description of a specific production example by naked-eye 3D stereoscopic viewing is omitted, basically, in other words, 3D is set as the default state, and the background image for SP reach G115 and the background for L reach When the image G114 and a specific preview effect are displayed in naked-eye 3D stereoscopic vision, by setting 3D to OFF (disabling) with the custom function, the SP reach background image G115, the L reach background image G114, and the A specific preview effect or the like can be displayed in 2D.

"Forecasting chance" that constitutes the fifth optional setting item is a foretelling effect that is executed based on the prefetching determination. Here, a detailed description of the look-ahead chance is omitted, but basically, in other words, the default state is set so that the look-ahead chance may be executed in the pachinko game machine PY4. By setting the prefetch chance to OFF (disabling) using the custom function, the prefetch chance can be prevented from being executed.

In this way, the pachinko game machine PY4 is configured so that the player can arbitrarily set the first effect specific item to the fifth effect specific item. In the default state after the above is performed, the premium-up mode is set to OFF as the first effect specific matter, the one-shot announcement is set to ON as the second effect specific matter, and the auto button is set to OFF as the third effect specific matter. 3D is set to ON as the fourth effect specific item, and look-ahead chance is set to ON as the fifth effect specific item. In addition, with respect to these default states, the first effect specific matter is that the premium-up mode is set to ON, the second effect specific matter is that the one-shot announcement is set to OFF, and the third effect specific matter is The state that the auto button is set to ON, the fact that 3D is set to OFF as the fourth specific effect item, and the fact that the look-ahead chance is set to OFF as the fifth specific effect item are each referred to as a “customization state”. called. Further, if any one of the first to fifth specified effects is in the customized state, the pachinko game machine PY4 as a whole is also in the customized state.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns OFF a flag (premium up mode flag) indicating that the premium up mode is set to ON in the first specific item storage unit 128a as a default state related to various specific effect items. , In the second specific item storage unit 128b, the flag (one-shot notification prohibition flag) indicating that the one-shot notification is set to OFF (prohibition of one-shot notification) is turned OFF, and in the third specific item storage unit 128c, A flag (auto button flag) indicating that the auto button is set to ON is turned OFF, and a flag (3D prohibition flag) indicating that 3D is set to OFF (prohibition of 3D) in the fourth specific item storage unit 128d. ) is turned off, and a flag (prefetch prohibition flag) indicating that the prefetch chance is set to OFF (prohibition of the prefetch chance) is turned off in the fifth specific item storage unit 128e. Therefore, in the customized state, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the premium-up mode flag in the first specific item storage unit 128a, turns on the one-shot notification prohibition flag in the second specific item storage unit 128b, and The auto button flag is turned on in the 3rd specific item storage unit 128c, the 3D prohibition flag is turned on in the 4th specific item storage unit 128d, and the prefetching prohibition flag is turned on in the 5th specific item storage unit 128e. Become.

Next, operations related to custom functions in the pachinko game machine PY4 will be described. As operations related to custom functions, there are non-game custom operations that can be performed when a game is not being played, and in-game custom operations that can be performed while a game is being played. The non-game custom operation can be executed using the cross button 40k and the first effect button 41k, and the during game custom operation can be executed using the cross button 40k.

In addition, the display of the custom function on the display unit 50a will be described below. As an operation related to the custom function, when the cross button 40k or the first effect button 41k is operated, various detection signals (upper signal, lower operation unit detection signal, right operation unit detection signal, left operation unit detection signal, first production button detection signal) are input to the production control board 120 . When various detection signals are input, the effect control microcomputer 121 immediately transmits a command indicating the detection signal to the image control board 140 . Then, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is based on the command indicating the detection signal. Cursors G76, G71c, G72c, G73c, G74c, G75c, and G83, which will be described later, are appropriately moved as shown.

First, the non-game custom operation will be described. 84 to 87 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the non-game custom operation. In the pachinko gaming machine PY4, for example, in the state where the special figure variable display and the jackpot game are not performed (customer waiting state), as shown in FIG. is displayed, when the first effect button 41k is operated, the effect control microcomputer 121, as shown in FIG. The screen changes to a screen (setting selection screen) where an operation can be selected.

On the setting selection screen, the background image (first normal background image G111 in FIG. 84B) related to the game that was displayed immediately before entering the customer waiting state is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (“9, 3, 5” in FIG. 84(B)) that had been stopped and displayed immediately before entering the customer waiting state are superimposed on the background image, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed. An image (screen transition explanation image) G70 for explaining how to transition to a screen related to a custom operation during non-game and a screen related to an operation for changing volume/light intensity is displayed superimposed on EZ3.

In the screen transition explanation image G70, a figure in which the up/down button 40k1 is emphasized in the cross button 40k is displayed, and an explanation "Move to the menu screen" is displayed to the right of the figure. Among the buttons 40k, a figure is displayed in which the left/right button 40k2 is emphasized, and an explanatory text "You can change the sound volume and the amount of light" is displayed to the right of the figure. When the up/down button 40k1 is operated, the screen transition explanation image G70 transitions to a screen (non-game custom operation screen) related to the custom operation during non-game, and when the left/right button 40k2 is operated, the screen transition explanation image G70 is related to the operation for changing the volume/light amount. It explains how to move to the screen.

Therefore, when the up/down button 40k1 is operated while the screen transition explanation image G70 is being displayed, the effect control microcomputer 121 switches from the setting selection screen to the non-game custom operation screen. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the non-game custom operation screen G102 on the display section 50a.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a specific example of the non-game custom operation screen. The non-game custom operation screen G102 includes an area (first effect specific item area) G71 for operating a custom function related to the first effect specific item (premium up mode), and a second effect specific item (one-shot notification). ) for operating the custom function (second specified effect area) G72, and an area for operating the custom function (third specified effect area) for the third specified effect (auto button). G73, an area for operating a custom function related to the fourth optional setting item (3D) (fourth specific effect area) G74, and an operation of a custom function related to the fifth optional setting item (forecast chance). A region for performing (fifth effect specific matter region) G75 is formed in substantially the same horizontally long rectangular shape. In the fourth embodiment, a first effect specific matter area G71, a second effect specific matter area G72, a third effect specific matter area G73, and a fourth effect specific matter area G74 are provided in the substantially upper half of the non-game custom operation screen G102. , and a fifth effect specific matter area G75 are arranged side by side from top to bottom.

Inside each of the specific effect areas G71, G72, G73, G74, and G75, the name representing the specific effect (premium top mode, one-shot announcement, auto button, 3D, look-ahead chance) is displayed left-aligned. It is In addition, in each of the specific effect matter areas G71, G72, G73, G74, and G75, default selection portions G71a, G72a, G73a, G74a, G75a, and customization selection sections G71b, G72b, G73b, G74b, and G75b indicating that the customization state is selected are formed.

A first default selection portion G71a is formed in the first effect specific item area G71 to indicate that the first effect specific item is in a default state (the premier-up mode is set to OFF). Further, on the right side of the first default selection section G71a, there is formed a first customization selection section G71b that indicates that the first effect specifying item is in the customization state (the premier-up mode is set to ON).

A second default selection portion G72a is formed in the second effect specific item area G72 to indicate that the second effect specific item is in a default state (one-shot notification is set to ON). Further, on the right side of the second default selection section G72a, there is formed a second customization selection section G72b that indicates that the second effect specifying item is in the customization state (one-shot notification is set to OFF).

A third default selection portion G73a is formed in the third effect specific matter area G73 to indicate that the third effect specific matter is in a default state (the auto button is set to OFF). Further, on the right side of the third default selection section G73a, there is formed a third customization selection section G73b representing that the third effect specifying item is in the customization state (the auto button is set to ON).

A fourth default selection portion G74a is formed in the fourth effect specific item area G74 to indicate that the fourth effect specific item is in a default state (3D is set to ON). Further, on the right side of the fourth default selection section G74a, there is formed a fourth customization selection section G74b indicating that the fourth effect specifying item is in the customization state (3D is set to OFF).

In the fifth effect specific matter area G75, a fifth default selection portion G75a representing that the fifth effect specific matter is in the default state (read-ahead chance is set to ON) is formed. Further, on the right side of the fifth default selection section G75a, there is formed a fifth customization selection section G75b representing that the fifth effect specifying item is in the customization state (read-ahead chance is set to OFF).

In the fourth embodiment, the first default selection section G71a, the first customization selection section G71b, the second default selection section G72a, the second customization selection section G72b, the third default selection section G73a, the third customization selection section G73b, The fourth default selection section G74a, the fourth customization selection section G74b, the fifth default selection section G75a, and the fifth customization selection section G75b are formed in substantially the same horizontally long rectangular shape. Also, the first default selection section G71a, the second default selection section G72a, the third default selection section G73a, the fourth default selection section G74a, and the fifth default selection section G75a are aligned in the vertical direction (aligned in the horizontal direction). The first customization selection section G71b, the second customization selection section G72b, the third customization selection section G73b, the fourth customization selection section G74b, and the fifth customization selection section G75b are arranged vertically (left and right). directionally aligned).

In addition, inside each of the first effect specific matter area G71, the second effect specific matter area G72, the third effect specific matter area G73, the fourth effect specific matter area G74, and the fifth effect specific matter area G75, a selection Sub-cursors G71c, G72c, G73c, G74c, and G75c are displayed to indicate the state (default state/customization state) related to each specified effect item. The sub-cursors G71c-G75c associated with the specific effect areas G71-G75 are frame-shaped graphics that overlap the outer perimeters of the default selection sections G71a-G75a and the customization selection sections G71b-G75b.

When the non-playing custom operation screen G102 is displayed when each performance specific item is completely in the default state for the pachinko machine PY4 as a whole, as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the sub cursors G71c to G75c select the default selection portions G71a to G75a. Specifically, when the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the sub cursor (first sub cursor) G71c relating to the first effect specific item is displayed overlapping the first default selection portion G71a, and the The sub-cursor (second sub-cursor) G72c relating to the second effect specific item is displayed to overlap the second default selection part G72a, and the sub-cursor (third sub-cursor) G73c relating to the third effect specific item is displayed just above the second default selection part G72a. A sub cursor (fourth sub-cursor) G74c which is displayed overlapping the 3 default selection portion G73a and pertains to the fourth effect specifying item (fourth sub-cursor) G74c is displayed to overlap the fourth default selection portion G74a and is displayed overlapping the fifth effect specifying item G74a. A cursor (fifth sub-cursor) G75c is displayed overlapping the fifth default selection portion G75a.

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY4, each sub cursor G71c to G75c can be individually moved between each default selection section G71a to G75a and each customization selection section G71b to G75b by operating the left/right button 40k2. Yes, that is, each rendition specific can be individually changed between the default state and the customized state. However, the operation can be performed when the effect specifying item is selected.

A main cursor G76 can be displayed to the left of each specific effect area G71 to G75 to indicate that the specific effect item is selected. A default state and a customized state can be selected for the specified effect items related to the specified effect items areas G71 to G75 on the left side of which the main cursor G76 is arranged. Although the display content of the main cursor G76 can be set as appropriate, in the fourth embodiment, the main cursor G76 is composed of a black equilateral triangle with vertices arranged vertically and to the right.

When the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the main cursor G76 is displayed to the left of the first effect specific item area G71. That is, when the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the first effect specific item is initially selected.

Below the fifth specific effect area G75, an explanation text display area G77 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle for displaying an explanation text related to the specific effect item selected by the main cursor G76. Therefore, when the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the explanation display area G77 displays an explanation regarding the first effect specific item (premium up mode) (in the fourth embodiment, "premium effect frequency can be selected"). ) is displayed.

Further, after the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the main cursor G76 can be moved by operating the up/down button 40k1, in other words, the effect specific items to be selected can be changed. Between the effect specific matter areas G71 to G75, when the lower operation unit 40kd is operated once, the main cursor G76 moves downward by one of the effect specific matter areas G71 to G75. On the other hand, between the effect specific matter areas G71 to G75, when the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once, the main cursor G76 moves upward by one of the effect specific matter areas G71 to G75.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(A), when the lower operation unit 40kd is operated once from the situation in FIG. 85, the main cursor G76 moves downward by one position as shown in FIG. 86(B). to the left of the second effect specific item area G72, and the second effect specific item is selected, and the second effect specific item (one shot An explanation (in the fourth embodiment, "you can select whether or not to make a one-shot announcement") is displayed. When the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(B), the situation shown in FIG. 86(A) is obtained.

Further, when the lower operation unit 40kd is operated once from the situation shown in FIG. 86(B), the main cursor G76 moves downward by one position as shown in FIG. 86(C) to specify the third effect. It is arranged on the left side of the item area G73, and the third effect specifying item is selected, and the description display area G77 displays an explanation (fourth embodiment) related to the third effect specifying item (auto button). , "You can select whether or not to use the auto button") is displayed. When the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), the situation shown in FIG. 86(B) is obtained.

Further, when the lower operation unit 40kd is operated once from the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), the main cursor G76 moves downward by one as shown in FIG. 86(D) to specify the fourth effect. Arranged to the left of the matter area G74, the fourth effect specific item is selected, and an explanation text (in the fourth embodiment, "You can choose whether or not to use 3D") is displayed. When the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the situation becomes as shown in FIG. 86(C).

Further, when the lower operation unit 40kd is operated once from the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the main cursor G76 moves downward by one position as shown in FIG. 86(E) to specify the fifth effect. It is arranged on the left side of the item area G75, and the fifth effect specifying item is selected, and the explanatory text display area G77 displays an explanatory text related to the fifth effect specifying item (read-ahead chance) (fourth embodiment , "You can select whether or not to have a look-ahead effect") is displayed. When the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E), the situation shown in FIG. 86(D) is obtained.

Also, although not shown, when the right operation section 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(A), the first sub-cursor G71c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the first customization selection section G71b. , the customization state (premium-up mode ON setting) is selected for the first effect specific item. On the other hand, in that situation, when the left operation section 40kl is operated once, the first sub-cursor G71c moves to the left and is displayed overlapping the first default selection section G71a, indicating the default state ( OFF setting of premier up mode) is selected.

Also, although not shown, when the right operation section 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(B), the second sub-cursor G72c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the second customization selection section G72b. , a state in which the customization state (one-shot notification OFF setting) is selected for the second effect specific item. On the other hand, in that situation, when the left operation section 40kl is operated once, the second sub-cursor G72c moves to the left and is displayed overlapping the second default selection section G72a, and the default state ( ON setting of one-shot notification) is selected.

Also, although not shown, when the right operation section 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), the third sub-cursor G73c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the third customization selection section G73b. , the customization state (ON setting of the auto button) is selected for the third effect specific item. On the other hand, in that situation, when the left operation section 40kl is operated once, the third sub-cursor G73c moves to the left and is displayed overlapping the third default selection section G73a, and the default state ( Auto button OFF setting) is selected.

Also, although not shown, when the right operation section 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the fourth sub-cursor G74c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the fourth customization selection section G74b. , the customization state (3D OFF setting) is selected for the fourth effect specific item. On the other hand, in that situation, when the left operation section 40kl is operated once, the fourth sub-cursor G74c moves to the left and is displayed overlapping the fourth default selection section G74a, indicating the default state ( 3D ON setting) is selected.

Also, although not shown, when the right operation section 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E), the fifth sub-cursor G75c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the fifth customization selection section G75b. , a state in which the customization state (read-ahead chance OFF setting) is selected for the fifth effect specific item. On the other hand, in that situation, when the left operation section 40kl is operated once, the fifth sub-cursor G75c moves to the left and is displayed overlapping the fifth default selection section G75a, indicating the default state ( ON setting of read-ahead chance) is selected.

The effect control board 120 (effect control microcomputer 121) can store the position of the main cursor G76, in other words, the effect specific item selected by the main cursor G76 in the effect RAM124. As described above, the non-game custom operation screen G102 is always displayed with the first effect specific item selected. Therefore, when the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the effect control microcomputer 121 , information indicating that the first effect specific item is currently selected is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for effect. Then, when the lower operating unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(A), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the second effect specific item is selected in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. do. Similarly, when the lower operating unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the upper operation unit detection signal is input, information indicating that the first effect specific item is selected is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for effect. Further, when the lower operating unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the fourth effect specific item is selected in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. On the other hand, when the upper operation unit detection signal is input, information indicating that the second effect specific item is selected is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for effect. Furthermore, when the lower operating unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the fifth effect specific item is selected in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. On the other hand, when the upper operation unit detection signal is input, information indicating that the third effect specific item is selected is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for effect. Further, when the upper operating section detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the fourth effect specific item is selected in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. do.

Also, the effect control microcomputer 121 appropriately updates the information stored in the effect specific item storage unit 128 when the left/right button 40k2 is operated. For example, in a completely default state as shown in FIG. 85 (FIG. 86(A)), the effect control microcomputer 121 has a premier-up mode flag, a one-shot notification prohibition flag, an auto button flag, a 3D prohibition flag, and a prefetch prohibition flag. flag is turned off.

Then, for example, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the premium-up mode flag when the right operation unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(A). On the contrary, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the premium-up mode flag when the left operation unit detection signal is input while the premium-up mode flag is ON. Similarly, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns ON the one-shot notification prohibition flag when the right operation unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(B). On the contrary, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the one-shot notification prohibition flag when the left operation unit detection signal is input in a situation where the one-shot notification prohibition flag is ON. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the auto button flag when the right operation unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C). On the contrary, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the auto button flag when the left operation unit detection signal is input while the auto button flag is on. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns ON the 3D prohibition flag when the right operation unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D). Conversely, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the 3D prohibition flag when the left operation unit detection signal is input while the 3D prohibition flag is ON. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 121 turns on the prefetch prohibition flag when the right operation unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E). On the contrary, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the look-ahead prohibition flag when the left operation unit detection signal is input while the look-ahead prohibition flag is ON.

Further, below the explanation text display area G77, there is an end portion G78 indicating that the operation related to the non-game custom function has been selected, in other words, the closing of the non-game custom operation screen G102 has been selected. An initialization section G79 indicating that each effect specific item is set to a default state is arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The end part G78 and the initialization part G79 can be selected with the main cursor G76. As shown in FIG. 86(E), when the lower operation section 40kd is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of the fifth effect specific matter area G75, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the end section G78. move next door. Further, when the right operation section 40kr is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is arranged to the left of the end section G78, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the initialization section G79. Further, when the left operation portion 40kl is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is arranged to the left of the initialization portion G79, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the end portion G78. Further, when the upper operation unit 40ku is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is arranged to the left of the end portion G78, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the fifth effect specific matter area G75.

When the first effect button 41k is operated while the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of the end portion G78, the non-game custom operation screen G102 is switched to the setting selection screen, and the non-game custom operation is performed. At the same time, the state (default state/customized state) of each effect specified item indicated by the positions of the sub-cursors G71c to G75c in each effect specified item area G71 to G75 at that time is determined.

For example, the player finally selects the first customization selection section G71b with the first sub-cursor G71c and selects the second default selection section G72a with the second sub-cursor G72c, as shown in FIG. 87(A). The third sub-cursor G73c selects the third customization selection section G73b, the fourth sub-cursor G74c selects the fourth default selection section G74a, and the fifth sub-cursor G75c selects the fifth customization selection section G75b. In other words, the customized state is selected for the first, third, and fifth specified effects, and the default state is selected for the second, fourth, and fourth specified effects. Suppose you are in a state where Also, the main cursor G76 is arranged to the left of the end portion G78.

Then, when the first effect button 41k is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 87(A), as shown in FIG. 87(B), the non-game custom operation screen G102 is switched to the setting selection screen. As a result, it becomes impossible to perform custom operations during non-game, and the states related to various specific effects are fixed. However, as shown in FIG. When the non-game custom operation screen G102 is switched to the setting selection screen in this state, the effect control microcomputer 121 is in the state of customizing the effect specific items for the pachinko game machine PY4 as a whole in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 ( A flag (effect customization state flag) indicating that the default state is not complete is turned ON.

The game by the player is started from the situation shown in FIG. 87 (B), for example, when the game ball wins the first start opening 11 and the special figure 1 variable display is started, it is shown in FIG. 87 (C) As shown, the screen transition explanation image G70 disappears, and the setting selection screen is switched to the screen for the game, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been stopped and displayed start the variable display (special figure variable effect). In this way, when the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the pachinko game machine PY4 as a whole is changed from the default state to the customized state by the non-game custom operation, and then the special figure variation effect is performed first. , the in-game custom operation image G80, which will be described later, is not displayed.

Next, in-game custom operations will be described. 88 to 90 are explanatory diagrams for explaining custom operations during play.

After the situation shown in FIG. 87 (C), for example, a plurality of special figures 1 variable display is continuously executed, and finally, a special figure 1 stop display of a mode showing loss is performed, and accordingly Suppose that the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the form of showing a failure is performed. And here, as shown in FIG. 88(A), if 30 seconds continue without performing the next special figure 1 variable display, in other words, the special figure 1 variable display or the jackpot game is not executed. When the customer waiting state continues for 30 seconds, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the display section 50a to display a customer waiting demo animation G100, as shown in FIG. 88(B).

Next, after the customer waiting demo animation G100 as shown in FIG. When the variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is switched to the first normal background image G111, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 which are variablely displayed appear. At this timing, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays an image (in-game custom operation image) G80 for performing the in-game custom operation in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the display unit 50a, superimposed on the first normal background image G111. to display.

In this way, the effect control microcomputer 121 enters the customization state by the operation on the custom operation screen G102 during non-game (custom operation during non-game), and after the special figure variable display is performed once, the customer waits again. state, the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, and the special figure variable display is executed from this state, and when the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (special figure variable performance) is performed, a custom operation image during the game is displayed. G80 is displayed to enable custom operation during the game. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 121 changes the special figure variable display ( When the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the special figure variable performance) is started, a custom operation image G80 during the game is displayed to enable the custom operation during the game.

Since it is a "customer waiting state newly started (shifted) after the production customization state flag is turned ON", for example, the state shown in FIG. 87(B) is shifted to the state shown in FIG. 87(C). Even if the customer waiting demonstration animation G100 is displayed without the customer waiting demonstration animation G100, the customer waiting demonstration animation G100 is the customer waiting demonstration animation G100 that is displayed first in the customer waiting state that the customer is already staying when the production customization state flag is turned on. Since it is G100 and is not the customer waiting demonstration animation G100 displayed in the customer waiting state newly started (shifted) after the production customization state flag is turned ON, the special figure is obtained from such a customer waiting demonstration animation G100. Even if variable display (variable display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, special symbol variable effect) is started, the in-game custom operation image G80 is not displayed. Furthermore, for example, even in the customer waiting state that is first started after the effect customization state flag is turned on, the customer waiting demo video G100 is not displayed there and the special figure variable display (variable display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, special Even if the figure fluctuation effect) is started, the in-game custom operation image G80 is not displayed. That is, the conditions under which the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, in other words, the conditions under which the in-game custom operation can be performed are at least that the special figure variable display is performed after entering the customization state, and that the customer waiting is performed. It includes starting the special figure variable display (variable display of production patterns EZ1 to EZ3, special figure variation production) from the state where the demonstration animation G100 is displayed.

Further, when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the aforementioned effect customization state flag. Further, in the fourth embodiment, for example, in a situation where the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed as shown in FIG. When the FIG. 1 variable display starts, the situation shown in FIG. 87(C) is obtained. It should be noted that the transition of this situation is the same in the non-playing custom operation screen G102, whether the performance specific items are completely defaulted or at least partly customized. In addition, at that time, if it is in the customization state, the production control microcomputer 121 turns ON the production customization state flag when the special figure 1 variable display starts. That is, when the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the special figure variable display is started when the first effect button 41k is operated when the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of the end portion G78. have the same functionality as

By the way, the in-game custom operation image G80 shown in FIG. 88(C) is simplified. Here, the in-game custom operation image G80 will be described in detail. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the in-game custom operation image G80.

FIG. 89A shows the state of the in-game custom operation image G80 immediately after the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 89(A), the in-game custom operation image G80 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a whole, and inside it is written "Do you want to continue customizing?". In other words, the in-game custom operation image G80 functions as an effect asking whether or not to continue the customized state of the specific effect item. Further, inside the in-game custom operation image G80, there are a continuation selection portion G81 indicating selection of continuation of the customization state, an end selection portion G82 indicating selection of termination of the customization state, and a continuation selection portion G81. A cursor G83 that can be moved between the end selection portion G82 and indicates that the arranged one is selected, and the remaining time during which the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed (remaining in-game custom operation image G80). ) is provided. It should be noted that the in-game custom operation image G80 functions as an effect asking whether or not to continue the customized state of the specific effect item. It may be changed as appropriate as long as it is recognizable that it is questioned as to whether or not to continue the state.

The in-game custom operation can be performed while the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, and the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed for three seconds. In other words, the valid time for the custom operation during the game is 3 seconds. The remaining time display section G84, which indicates the custom remaining time during play, consists of a linear progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the custom remaining time during play.

The continuation selection portion G81 and the end selection portion G82 are formed in the same substantially horizontally long rectangular shape and arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Specifically, the continuation selection section G81 is arranged on the left side, and the end selection section G82 is arranged on the right side. The cursor G83 is formed of a frame-like figure that overlaps the peripheries of the continuation selection portion G81 and the end selection portion G82. It is displayed overlapping the outer line of . That is, when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, the end of the customization state is selected. Since the line related to the cursor G83 is considerably thicker than the outer peripheral lines of the continuation selection portion G81 and the end selection portion G82, the player can easily determine whether the cursor G83 is in the continuation selection portion G81 or the end selection portion G82. It shall be possible to easily understand whether it overlaps with

Then, when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, by operating the left/right button 40k2, the cursor G83 is alternately moved between the continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82, in other words, continuation of customization and selection of customization. can be alternately selected. A cursor G83 is displayed overlapping the end selection portion G82, and when the left operation portion 40kl is operated while the end selection portion G82 is selected, the cursor G83 moves to the left and overlaps the continuation selection portion G81, The continuation selection section G81 is selected. On the other hand, when the cursor G83 is displayed overlapping the continuation selection portion G81 and the continuation selection portion G81 is selected, if the right operation portion 40kr is operated, the cursor G83 moves rightward to the end selection portion G82. It overlaps and the end selection part G82 is selected.

For example, when the cursor G83 shown in FIG. 89(A) selects the end selection part G82, a little time (0.75 seconds) passes and the situation shown in FIG. When the operation section 40kl is operated, the cursor G83 selects the continuation selection section G81 as shown in FIG. 89(C). Further, when the right operation section 40kr is operated, the cursor G83 selects the end selection section G82 as shown in FIG. 89(D).

As shown in FIGS. 89(A) to 89(D), the in-game custom remaining time displayed in the remaining time display section G84 is displayed according to the lapse of time after the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed. The represented portion (the colored portion in FIG. 89) shrinks toward the left. Then, when the custom game remaining time reaches 0 second, as shown in FIG. 89E, the portion representing the game custom remaining time related to the remaining time display section G84 disappears.

Then, as soon as the part representing the custom-in-game remaining time related to the remaining-time display section G84 disappears, the custom-in-game operation image G80 disappears as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 89(A) to 89(E), while the time has passed since the in-game custom operation image G80 was displayed, the left/right button 40k2 is operated and the cursor G83 moves to the continuation selection portion G81. , and the end selection section G82, the display section 50a is not affected by these, and the special figure variation effect is appropriately developed.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 grasps in real time which of the continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82 is selected by the cursor G83. Then, customization control is performed in accordance with the arrangement of the cursor G83 when the custom remaining time during the game reaches 0 second. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets all the flags in the effect specific item storage unit 128 when the cursor G83 selects the end selection part G82 when the custom remaining time during the game reaches 0 seconds. is set to OFF, the performance specific items are brought to a completely default state. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 121 maintains all flags in the effect specific item storage unit 128 when the cursor G83 selects the continuation selection part G81 when the custom remaining time during the game reaches 0 second. By doing so, the current state of customization of the effect specific matter is continued.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 89(E), when the cursor G83 selects the end selection part G82 and the custom remaining time during game reaches 0 second, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores effect specific items. All the flags (premier-up mode flag, one-shot notification prohibition flag, auto button flag, 3D prohibition flag, prefetch prohibition flag) stored in a part 128 are turned off, and performance specific matters are put in a complete default state. In this case, after that, when the non-playing custom operation screen G102 is displayed for the first time, as shown in FIG. It is displayed when G71a to G75a are selected.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 89(D), when the cursor G83 selects the continuation selection section G81 and the custom remaining time becomes 0 seconds during the game, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the effect specific item All the flags stored in the storage unit 128 (premier-up mode flag, one-shot notification prohibition flag, auto button flag, 3D prohibition flag, pre-reading prohibition flag) are maintained as they are, and the current state of the performance specific matters continue with the customization state. In this case, when the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed for the first time thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the non-game custom operation screen G102 changes to the in-game custom operation screen shown in FIG. The same contents as those of the non-game custom operation screen G102 that was customized immediately before the image G80 was displayed (the sub-cursors G71c, G73c, and G75c selected the customization selection sections G71b, G73b, and G75b, the sub-cursors G72c, G73c is displayed with the content of selecting the default selection portions G72a and G74a.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 88(C), when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, the effect customization state flag is turned OFF. This effect customization state flag that has been turned off is turned on even if the remaining time of the in-game custom operation reaches 0 seconds while the cursor G83 is selecting the continuation selection section G81 in the in-game custom operation image G80, for example. not. Therefore, when the customizing state is continued as a custom operation during the game, even if the customizing state is maintained thereafter, the customer waiting state is entered and the customer waiting demonstration animation G100 is displayed on the display unit 50a. , when the special figure variable display is started while the customer waiting demo video G100 is being displayed, and when the special figure variation effect (variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3) is started, the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed. not.

In addition, from the point of view of changing various specified effects, for example, the specified effects are in the customized state, and the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed in the state shown in FIG. It is assumed that the intermediate custom operation causes the sub-cursors G71c to G75c to finally select the default selection sections G71a to G75a, and the setting selection screen is displayed. In other words, it is assumed that the customization state is changed to the default state by a non-game custom operation. In this case, the effect customization state flag is not turned ON even though the effect specific item has been changed. Therefore, after this, once the special figure variable display is performed, the customer waiting state is set again, and the customer waiting demo animation G100 is displayed, and the special figure variable display is executed from that state, and the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are performed. is performed, the in-game custom operation image G80 is not displayed. In other words, the opportunity to allow custom operations during play never comes.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of changing various specified effects, for example, the specified effects are in the customized state, and the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed in the state shown in FIG. With the middle custom operation, the sub-cursors G71c-G73c finally select the customization selection sections G71b-G73b, and the sub-cursors G74c-G75c select the customization selection sections G74b-G75b, and the setting selection screen is displayed. and In other words, it is assumed that a customization state is changed from one customization state to another customization state by a non-game custom operation. In this case, the production customization state flag is turned ON. Therefore, after this, once the special figure variable display is performed, the customer waiting state is set again, and the customer waiting demonstration animation G100 is displayed, and the special figure variable display is executed from that state, and the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are performed. When the variation display (special figure variation effect) is performed, the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed to enable in-game custom operation. It should be noted that the subsequent display control when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed is the same as when the default state is changed to the customization state.

In addition, from the viewpoint of changing each specific effect item, for example, the specific effect item is in the default state, and the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 87(A). If the button 40k is not operated, or if the cross button 40k is operated, the sub-cursors G71c, G74c, and G75c finally select the customization selection sections G71b, G73b, and G75b, and the sub-cursors G72c and G74c select Assume that the setting selection screen is displayed while the default selection sections G72b and G72b are selected. In other words, it is assumed that the non-playing custom operation screen G102 was once displayed, but the default state did not change from before the screen was displayed. In this case, the production customization state flag is turned ON. Therefore, after this, once the special figure variable display is performed, the customer waiting state is set again, and the customer waiting demonstration animation G100 is displayed, and the special figure variable display is executed from that state, and the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are performed. When the variation display (special figure variation effect) is performed, the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed to enable in-game custom operation. It should be noted that the subsequent display control when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed is the same as when the default state is changed to the customization state.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of changing each effect specific item, for example, the effect specific item is in the default state, and the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 85(A). When the button 40k is not operated, or when the cross button 40k is operated, the sub-cursors G71c to G75c finally select the default selection sections G71a to G75a, and the setting selection screen is displayed. and In other words, it is assumed that the non-game custom operation screen G102 was once displayed, but the default state did not change as before the screen was displayed. In this case, the effect customization state flag is not turned ON even though the effect specific item has been changed. Therefore, after this, once the special figure variable display is performed, the customer waiting state is set again, and the customer waiting demonstration animation G100 is displayed, and the special figure variable display is executed from that state, and the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are performed. is performed, the in-game custom operation image G80 is not displayed. In other words, the opportunity to allow custom operations during play never comes.

Although descriptions of specific effects and control contents related to premiere effect, one-shot announcement, auto button, effect using naked-eye 3D stereoscopic vision, and look-ahead chance are omitted, the effect control board 120 Based on the information stored in the item storage unit 128, the premiere effect, one-shot announcement, auto button, effect using naked-eye 3D stereoscopy, and look-ahead chance are appropriately controlled.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY4, the default state (default first specification) and the There is a customization state (second specification different from the first specification), and the specification of the production specific items (first production specific item to fifth production specific item: specific item related to production) is the customized state (different from the first specification 2nd specification), it is possible to display an in-game custom operation image G80 asking whether to continue setting the customization state (second specification different from the 1st specification) on the display unit 50a (a specific display is executed on the display unit). possible), for example, when the player does not know that there is a function that can change the performance specific items, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with unintended specifications, thereby reducing the interest in the game. can be suppressed. In addition, in the customer waiting state (non-gaming state) in which the special figure variable display (variable display of identification information) and the jackpot game (specific game) are not executed, the game balls enter the start ports 11 and 12 (predetermined Since the in-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed (specific display is executed) when the special figure variable display (variable display of identification information) is being executed (when the condition is satisfied), Since the player who has started the game can be made aware of the change function of the performance specific item, it is possible to further suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Furthermore, in the customer waiting state (non-gaming state), the specifications of the specific items of production (specific items related to the production) are customized from the default state (first specification) by operating the cross button 40k or the first production button 41k (operating means). It is possible to change to the state (second specification), and in the customer waiting state (non-gaming state), the specification of the specified items (specific items related to the effect) is changed from the default state (first specification) to the customized state (second specification). When changed, in the special figure variable display (variable display of identification information) executed when the game ball wins in the start ports 11 and 12 in the customer waiting state (non-gaming state) (predetermined condition is established) The custom operation image G80 during play is not displayed (specific display is executed), and the game ball wins the starting holes 11 and 12 in the next customer waiting state (non-game state) (predetermined condition is established). In the executed special figure variable display (variable display of identification information), the in-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed (executed specific display), so that the effect specific items are changed to the customized state at their own will. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by displaying the in-game custom operation image G80 to the changed player, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

(Modified example of the fourth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

There are premier-up mode, one-shot announcement, auto button, 3D, and look-ahead chance as specific effects that can be arbitrarily set by the player, but the specific contents of specific effects are not particularly limited. It may be changed as appropriate. In addition, although there are five types of effect specific items that can be arbitrarily set by the player, the number of types is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

The non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed by operating the up/down button 40k1 (upper operation unit 40ku or lower operation unit 40kd) while the setting selection screen is displayed. The display method of the screen G102 is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when the first effect button 41k or the second effect button 42k is operated while the customer waiting demo animation G100 is being displayed, the non-game custom operation screen G102 may be displayed. Alternatively, in the customer waiting state, on the display unit 50a, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are superimposed and stop-displayed on the background image displayed in the normal variation such as the first normal background image G111. The non-game custom operation screen G102 may be displayed when the first effect button 41k or the second effect button 42k is operated while the game is being played.

Further, when the first effect button 41k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, the setting selection screen is displayed. can be changed to For example, in the customer waiting state, when the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, any operation of the cross button 40k, the first effect button 41k, and the second effect button 42k does not switch to the setting selection screen. However, the presentation time of the customer-waiting demonstration animation G100 may be set, and when the customer-waiting demonstration animation G100 ends, the setting selection screen may be displayed. Further, in this case, the continuous display time of the setting selection screen is set, and unless the up/down button 40k1 or the left/right button 40k2 is operated, the continuous display time elapses after the setting selection screen is displayed. , the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed again, and thereafter, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 and the setting selection screen may be alternately displayed repeatedly unless the up/down button 40k1 or the left/right button 40k2 is operated on the setting selection screen. .

The display content/layout of the non-game custom operation screen G102 is a range in which the player can arbitrarily set the state (default state/customization state) related to various specific effects through operations while the screen G102 is displayed. can be changed as appropriate. For example, the operation method for moving the main cursor G76 (method for selecting specific effects) and the operation method for moving sub-cursors G71c to G75c (method for selecting states related to various specific effects) can be changed as appropriate. good too.

Further, when the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of the end portion G78 on the non-game custom operation screen G102, if the first effect button 41k is operated, the setting selection screen is displayed, and the sub-cursor at that time is displayed. Based on the positions of G71c-G75c (states of sub-cursors G71c-G75c overlapping any of the default selection sections G71a-G75a or customization selection sections G71b-G75b), states related to various specific effects are determined. The operation method for this determination may also be changed as appropriate. For example, if the first effect button 41k is operated while the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of any of the effect specific items G71 to G75, the setting selection screen is displayed, and the sub cursors G71c to G75c at that time are displayed. It may be determined to be a state related to various effect specific items based on the position of .

When the special figure variable display is started while the non-game custom operation screen G102 is being displayed, a state relating to various effect specific items based on the positions of the sub-cursors G71c to G75c at that time is determined. In this case, even if the state of any of the performance specific items has been changed since the non-game custom operation screen G102 was displayed, the change is not recognized and the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed. You may make it become the state which concerns on the production|presentation specific matter at the time.

The time during which the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, in other words, the valid time for the in-game custom operation is not particularly limited, and may be changed as appropriate. In addition, the display content/layout of the in-game custom operation image G80 can be appropriately changed within the range where the player can arbitrarily set the continuation and termination of the customization state by operation while the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed. You may For example, each time the first effect button 41k is operated, the cursor G83 moves to the unselected direction. good.

Also, when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, the cursor G83 is displayed overlapping the end selection portion G82. , in other words, continuation of the customization state may be selected.

When continuation of the customization state is selected in the custom operation during the game, the customer waiting state is entered after that, and when the customer waiting demo animation G100 is displayed in the customer waiting state, the special figure variable display is started and the special figure is displayed. When the variation effect is executed, the in-game custom operation image G80 is not displayed in the special figure variation effect, but the in-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed. In this case, as long as the customization state continues, the in-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed each time in the first special figure variation effect executed from the customer waiting demo video G100, The display of the in-game custom operation image G80 may be restricted even if the customization state continues, such as up to the first predetermined number of times or up to a specific period thereafter.

After entering the customized state by the operation on the non-game custom operation screen G102 (non-game custom operation), the special figure variable display is performed once, and then the customer wait state is entered again, and the customer wait demo video G100 is displayed. Then, from that state, the first special figure variable display is executed, and when the first variation display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (special figure fluctuation production) is carried out, the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed. However, the setting selection screen is displayed in the customer waiting state again, and from that state, the first special figure variable display is executed, and the first variable display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 (special figure fluctuation production) is performed. In-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed even when the game is played.

When one customization state is changed to another customization state by an operation (non-game custom operation) on the non-game custom operation screen G102, the game-in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed in the subsequent specific special figure variation effect. However, in this case, the in-game custom operation image G80 may not be displayed.

Although the non-playing custom operation screen G102 is displayed in a certain customization state, even if the non-playing custom operation screen G102 is closed without changing the customization state as a result, a specific special figure variation effect is performed thereafter. , the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, but in this case, the in-game custom operation image G80 may not be displayed.

In a completely default state, the non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed, and if even one effect specific item is changed to the customization state by an operation (non-game custom operation) on the non-game custom operation screen G102, then the specific operation screen G102 is displayed. The in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed in the special figure variation effect. is in the customized state is a condition for displaying the in-game custom operation image G80. The image G80 may not be displayed. Here, as a distinction between specific effect specific matters and non-specific effect specific matters, for example, effect specific matters that can be set other than non-game custom operations are non-specific effect specific matters, and non-game custom operation The performance specific items that can be set only in , may be specific performance specific items.

When the in-game custom operation image G80 disappears in a state in which the end of the customization state is selected (when the in-game custom operation ends), the effect control microcomputer 121 sets flags relating to all the effect specific items at that time. The timing of turning OFF, in other words, the timing of the transition to the complete default state of the performance specific matters. is not particularly limited, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121, when the special figure variation effect being performed while the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, or when the next special figure variation effect starts, all You may turn off the flag related to the effect specific matter.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as a fifth embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment is composed of a so-called "1 type 2 type mixing machine". In one pachinko game machine PY5, when a special figure 1 lottery is performed with the winning of a game ball to the first start port 11 as a trigger and a jackpot is won, a jackpot game in which a first big prize port 14 described later opens is performed. When a special figure 2 lottery is performed with the specification called "first type (so-called" digipachi type ")" to be executed and the winning of the game ball to the second start port 12, and a small hit is won, A small winning game in which the second large winning opening 15 to be described later opens is executed, and the game ball entering the second large winning opening 15 opened in the small winning game is a specific area 16 (so-called “V zone”) to be described later. (so-called “V winning”), a specification called “second type (so-called “feather monotype”)” in which a jackpot game is executed is mixed.

Here, FIG. 92 shows a front view of the game board unit YU of the pachinko game machine PY5. As shown in FIG. 92, in the game area 6, there are a first big winning device 14D and a second big winning device 15D that can reversibly change between a state in which a game ball cannot win a prize and a state in which a game ball can win a prize. is provided. The first big winning device 14D corresponds to the big winning device 14D of the basic embodiment. Therefore, the first big winning device 14D is formed with a first big winning hole 14 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the first AT opening/closing member 14k provided in the first big winning device 14D. Also, the first big winning device 14D is provided with a first big winning hole sensor 14a for detecting that a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14 (winning a prize).

The second big winning device 15D is provided directly below the first big winning device 14D on the downstream side, and is partially configured in the same way as the first big winning device 14D. The second big winning device 15D is formed with a second big winning hole 15 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. , the second AT opening/closing member 15k provided in the second big winning device 15D takes a closed mode and an open mode. Further, the second big winning device 15D is provided with a second big winning hole sensor 15a for detecting that a game ball has entered (won) the second big winning hole 15. As shown in FIG.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out as the balls enter the first big prize hole 14 . In addition, 15 prize balls are paid out as the balls enter the second big winning hole 15.例文帳に追加

Next, the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15 will be described. FIG. 93 is an explanatory view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 91, as a configuration after the game ball has entered the second large prize winning port 15, a specific region 16 and a non-specific region 17 through which the game ball entering the second large prize winning port 15 can pass are provided. It is Further, a distribution member 16k capable of distributing the game ball entering the second big winning hole 15 to the specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 is provided.

The distribution member 16k is configured to be movable back and forth by a distribution solenoid 16s (see FIG. 94). The distribution solenoid 16s is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and the game control microcomputer 101 can control the distribution solenoid 16s in a small winning game to be described later.

The game control microcomputer 101 advances and retreats the distribution member 16k using the distribution solenoid 16s, so that the game ball that has won the second prize winning opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16, It is possible to set either a second passing state in which a game ball entering the second prize winning hole 15 can pass through the non-specific area 17.例文帳に追加The distribution member 16k is normally held at the advanced position so as to be in the second passing state, and when the small winning game is executed, it retreats to the retreating position for a predetermined time (for example, 2.8 seconds) and enters the first passing state. Change. The details of the operation of the distribution member 16k in the small winning game will be described later.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY5 is provided with a specific area sensor 16a (see FIG. 91) that detects game balls that have passed through the specific area 16 but does not detect game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 17. FIG. The specific area sensor 16 a is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101 , and outputs a signal to the game control board 100 indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 when the game ball is detected.

In addition, a transparent window (not shown) made of synthetic resin is provided in front of the specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17, and the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 is displayed in the specific area 16 and the non-specific area. The player can visually recognize which of 17 the player has passed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 in the pachinko game machine PY5 will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 in the pachinko game machine PY5. As shown in FIG. 94, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include a first AT solenoid 14s, a second AT solenoid 15s, and a distribution solenoid 16s.

Game control board 100, 1st AT solenoid 14s, 2nd AT solenoid 15s, and for each of the distribution solenoid 16s, the 1st AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and signals for controlling the drive of the distribution solenoid 16s can be output. The first AT solenoid 14s is connected to the first AT opening/closing member 14k, and the first AT opening/closing member 14k performs opening/closing operation by driving the first AT solenoid 14s. The second AT solenoid 15s is connected to the second AT opening/closing member 15k, and the second AT opening/closing member 15k performs opening/closing operation by driving the second AT solenoid 15s. The distribution solenoid 16s is connected to the distribution member 16k, and the distribution member 16k advances and retreats with respect to the front surface of the game board 1 by driving the distribution solenoid 16s.

In addition, as various sensors connected to the game control board 100, a first big winning hole sensor 14a, a second big winning hole sensor 15a, and a specific area sensor 16a are connected to the game control board 100 so as to output signals. ing. The first big winning hole sensor 14a can detect a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 14, and when the game ball is detected, a signal indicating that the game ball has won the first big winning hole 14 is played. Output to the control board 100 . The second big winning hole sensor 15a can detect a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15, and when the game ball is detected, a signal indicating that the game ball has won the second big winning hole 15 is played. Output to the control board 100 . The specific area sensor 16a can detect a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16, and when detecting the game ball, outputs a signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (V winning) to the game control board 100. do.

Next, the electrical configuration of the effect control board 120 side in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the effect control board 120 side in the fifth embodiment.

Although the details will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 121 of the pachinko game machine PY5 is triggered by a game state advantageous to the player, more specifically, when a special figure fluctuation display in a normal game state results in a big hit. After entering the time saving state, the time that has passed since the first time saving state ( time) is measured. The effect RAM 124 is provided with a timer 128 for measuring the lapsed time of the consecutive villas (the elapsed time timer of the consecutive villas) 128 . Renso elapsed time timer 128 is initially set to "0". When the production control microcomputer 121 starts measuring the elapsed time of the consecutive villas, it performs timer update processing (S4104), thereby appropriately updating the elapsed time timer 128 of the consecutive villas according to the elapsed time. That is, each time the timer update process is performed, the continuous elapsed time timer 128 is counted up by 1 msec.

Also, the connection between the payout control board 170 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the payout control board 170 to the effect control board 120 . That is, between the payout control board 170 and the effect control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as communication direction control means. And in 5th Embodiment, the payout control board 170 outputs the signal (contact detection signal) output from the touch switch 72a to the production control board 120 as it is. When the player is in contact with the handle 72k, a contact detection signal is output (turned ON), and when the player is not in contact with the handle 72k, the contact detection signal is not output (turned OFF). Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 can detect whether the player is in contact with the handle 72k or not. Further, the fact that the player is not in contact with the handle 72k means that the shooting operation of the game ball is not being performed, in other words, the shooting of the game ball is stopped. 121 indicates that the shooting operation of the game ball is not performed and that the stop of the shooting of the game ball can also be detected.

Next, game states that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY5 will be described. In the pachinko game machine PY5, only one kind of normal probability state is set as the game state related to the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination. On the other hand, as the game state related to the winning ease of the second starting port 12, similarly to the basic embodiment, a non-time-saving state (low base state) and a time-saving state (high base state) are set. Therefore, hereinafter, the low-probability low-base game state is referred to as "normal game state", and the low-probability high-base game state is simply referred to as "time-saving state".

In the normal game state, the pachinko game machine PY5 aims to win the first start hole 11 and continues to shoot the game ball with a left-handed shot to win the first start hole 11. It is configured so that it is easier to keep shooting the game ball by hitting it to the right so as to win the second starting hole 12 to win the second starting hole 12.例文帳に追加Furthermore, in the normal game state, rather than winning the second starting hole 12 by continuing to shoot the game ball with right hitting aiming to win the second starting hole 12, it is more likely to win the first starting hole 11. It is configured so that it is easier to shoot the game ball by hitting the left side aiming at the right side to win the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加

Also, in the fifth embodiment, when winning the first starting port 11, as in the basic embodiment, a maximum of four special figures 1 pending can occur, but in the second starting port 12 When winning a prize, the special figure 2 reservation cannot occur. In other words, the upper limit of the special figure 1 reservation number is 4, and the upper limit of the special figure 2 reservation number is "0".

Next, the jackpot determination according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot determination table referred to in the jackpot determination according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96 (A), as a jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination table (first jackpot determination table) according to special figure 1 used in jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) based on winning a prize to the first start port 11 ) and a jackpot determination table (second jackpot determination table) related to the special figure 2 used in jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) based on winning a prize to the second start port 12 are provided.

According to the first big win determination table, the first big win determination determines a big win or a loss. On the other hand, according to the second big win determination table, the second big win determination is determined to be a small win or a loss. As will be described later, when it is determined to be a small hit in the second big hit determination, the stop display of the special figure 2 in the form of finally showing a small hit with the special figure 2 variable display is executed (predetermined result "small hit" is derived), and a small winning game is executed according to the stop display. Then, when the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 in the small winning game passes through the specific area 16, the big winning game is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96(A), in the first big win determination, the probability of being determined as a big win is set to 1/319. On the other hand, in the determination of the second big win, the probability of being determined as a small win is set to 266/319 (≈1/1.2). As in the basic embodiment, in each jackpot determination table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number judgment value) is shown in FIG. They are distributed as appropriate so as to achieve the selectivity shown. However, the selection rate for the big win and the selection rate for the small win are not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, in the first big win determination, a small win may be included as the big win determination result. Alternatively, in the second big win determination, the big win may be included as the big win determination result.

Next, the big winning design and the small winning design according to the fifth embodiment will be described. As described above, the jackpot pattern is a special pattern that suggests the type of jackpot as well as the winning of the jackpot. The jackpot pattern is determined by the jackpot pattern type determination, and the jackpot pattern type determination is performed using a jackpot pattern type determination table. FIG. 96B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96(B), two types of jackpot patterns, a jackpot pattern A and a jackpot pattern B, are provided as the jackpot patterns of the special figure 1. FIG. According to the jackpot symbol type determination table related to the special figure 1, the jackpot pattern A is selected with a probability of 50%, and the jackpot pattern B is selected with a probability of 50%.

In addition, the small winning design is a special design that suggests the kind of small winning along with the winning of the small winning. In the special figure variable display when the small hit is won, the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed as a derivation of the result of the big hit determination. The small winning symbol is determined by the small winning symbol type determination, and the small winning symbol type determination is performed using the small winning symbol type determination table. FIG.96(C) is a figure which shows the structural example of the small hit symbol classification determination table which concerns on 5th Embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96(C), one type of small winning design, that is, the small winning design A, is provided as the special figure 2 small winning design. According to the small winning design type determination table related to the special figure 2, the small winning design A is selected with a probability of 100%.

In the fifth embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol random number, jackpot symbol type random number, reach random number and special figure variation pattern random number, the special symbol 2 related determination information includes a small A winning pattern type random number is also included. Therefore, in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, a small winning symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS) relating to the small winning symbol type random number is provided. Like the special symbol random number counter (label -TRND-T) and the jackpot symbol random number counter (label -TRND-OS), the small winning symbol type random number counter (label -TRND-KS) is a normal symbol / special symbol main random number It is updated in the update process (S003). Then, in step S211, the game control microcomputer 101 acquires a small hit symbol type random number as the special figure 2 related determination information, and stores it in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104. Although the range of the small hit symbol type random number can be set appropriately, it is set to "0 to 255" in the fifth embodiment.

Also, in the small hit design type determination table, the small hit design type which is the result of the small hit design type determination, the determination value of the small hit design type random number (small hit design type random number determination value) is shown in FIG. 96 (C) They are distributed as appropriate so as to achieve the selectivity shown. Therefore, as will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine PY5 collates the acquired small-hit symbol type random number with the small-hit symbol type determination table to determine the type of the small-hit symbol.

In addition, the number of jackpot design types and the number of small hit design types related to special figures 1 and 2, the selection rate of each jackpot design type, and the selection rate of each small hit design type are the fifth embodiment is not limited to , and may be set appropriately.

Next, a jackpot game according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, in the jackpot game, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, and when the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the game ball that wins the second big prize opening 15 opened in the small hit game executed after the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed. It is executed when passing through the specific area 16 (V winning). Then, the jackpot game components constituting the jackpot game, in other words, the jackpot game control table for controlling the jackpot game, the types of the special symbols stopped and displayed, more specifically, the jackpot patterns that trigger the execution of the jackpot game. It is associated with the type and the type of the small hit symbol. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot game control table according to the fifth embodiment.

Even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 in the small winning game. Therefore, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the direct execution trigger of the big winning game is that the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning), but the game ball does not enter the second big winning port 15. When the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 16, the winning to the second big winning hole 15 can be realized by opening the second big winning hole 15, and the opening of the second big winning hole 15 is a small hit. Since it is executed in the game, the stop display of the small winning pattern is also included in the execution timing of the big winning game.

Furthermore, hereinafter, winning a small win in the big win determination and stopping display of the small win pattern will be referred to as "small win / small win / becoming a small win", and winning a big win in the big win judgment, big win The stopped display of the symbol and the passing of the game ball through the specific area 16 are sometimes referred to as "big hit/get big hit/become big hit". As will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed, the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning) as long as the game ball is continuously shot normally. A small hit may be substantially positioned as a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 97, a jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), and a jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern B (hereinafter, "second jackpot game") ) is 10 times.

In addition, the number of executions of the round game related to the big winning game (hereinafter also referred to as "third big winning game") associated with the small winning symbol A is 10 times. In addition, the third jackpot game is a small hit game (hereinafter also referred to as "first small hit game") executed by the stop display of the small hit pattern A. When the game ball passes through the specific area 16, the small hit Executed when the game ends.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game components include the types of big winning openings to be opened. As shown in FIG. 97, regardless of the special symbol type, the first big winning opening 14 is set to open in all round games of all big winning games. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 97, regardless of the special symbol type, for all round games of all jackpot games, the number of openings of the first big winning port 14 in the round game is set to 1, and each opening The relevant time (opening time) is set to 29.5 seconds, and the closing time after opening (closing time) is set to 2.0 seconds. In addition, closing time is not set for the last round game in each jackpot game. This is because, after the opening of the first big winning hole 14 related to the last round game is finished, the ending in which the first big winning hole 14 is kept closed is performed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of the special symbol type, the opening time of all jackpot games (“OP time” in FIG. 97) is set to 10.0 seconds, and the ending time of all jackpot games (FIG. 97 , "ED time") is set to 10.0 seconds.

In addition, the specific values related to the jackpot game components are not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the opening time and ending time may be set to different values according to the game state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, the types of the big winning openings 14 and 15 to be opened may differ according to the order of the round game. Furthermore, according to the order of the round game, the number of times the big winning holes 14 and 15 are opened, the total time the big winning holes 14 and 15 are opened in the round game, and the closure after opening the big winning holes 14 and 15 The relevant time (closing time) may be different. Also, depending on the type of the small winning symbol, the number of times of execution of the round game in the big winning game and the total time during which the big winning openings 14 and 15 can be opened may be different.

Next, a small winning game according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine PY5 controls the opening and closing of the big winning openings 14 and 15 in the small winning game using the small winning game control table. In the fifth embodiment, the small winning game control table can be set in association with the type of the small winning symbol.

The small winning game control table stores elements (small winning game constituent elements) that constitute a small winning game, especially regarding opening and closing of the big winning openings 14 and 15 . The small winning game components include the type of large winning opening to be opened, the number of times the large winning opening is opened in the small winning game, the opening time (opening pattern) related to each opening, and the time to close until the next opening (closing time) , opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time). That is, the small winning game component is associated with the small winning symbol type. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small winning game control table according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 98, in the small winning game, the second big winning opening 15 is opened once. Then, the opening time of the second big winning opening 15 in the small winning game is 1.8 seconds. Also, the opening time of the small winning game is 2.0 seconds, and the ending time is 2.0 seconds.

Here, the details of the small winning game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a time chart showing the flow of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 99, when "small winning pattern (small winning pattern A)" is stopped and displayed as the special figure 2 stop display, a small winning game is performed. Then, according to the start of the small winning game, opening (small winning OP) is first performed in which the closed state of the second big winning opening 15 is maintained. This small winning OP continues until 2.0 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, and when the small winning OP ends, the second large winning opening 15 opens (opening of the small winning) and shaking. The dividing member 16k is retracted to enter the first passing state. This small hit opening continues until 1.8 seconds have passed since the start of the opening, or until 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 15, while the withdrawal of the distribution member 16k Continue until 2.8 seconds have elapsed after the start of the evacuation. Then, when the opening of the small win ends, the ending (small win ED) is performed in which the second big winning hole 15 is closed and the closed state is maintained. This small hit ED continues until 2.0 seconds have elapsed after the start of the ED, and the small hit game ends when the small hit ED ends.

The game ball entering the second big winning hole 15 during the small winning game passes through the specific area 16 without flowing down to the non-specific area 17 because the distribution member 16k is at the retracted position in the first passage state. On the other hand, in the second passage state, since the distribution member 16k is at the advanced position, it flows down on the distribution member 16k and passes through the non-specific region 17 . Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, a big winning game corresponding to the small winning symbol type is performed according to the end of the small winning game.

In addition, as described above, when the big winning game associated with the small winning symbol type is started, the first big winning opening 14 is held closed and the opening is performed over 10.0 seconds. A first round game is started according to the end of the opening, and the first big prize winning opening 14 is opened.

Further, in the small winning game, while the second big prize winning port 15 is open and until 1.0 second elapses after the second big prize winning port 15 is closed, the sorting member 16k is retracted. (the first passage state is maintained), and the game ball is in a state in which it is possible to pass through the specific area 16 (V win). Then, the pachinko game machine PY5 starts shooting the game ball with a right hit after the small hit game is started, and then continues to shoot the game ball with a right hit in the small hit game, basically ( It is configured so that the game ball can pass through the specific area 16 (V win) unless there is a particular problem. Further, when the game ball enters (wins) the second big prize hole 15 during the small winning game, regardless of whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 or not, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. be

Next, the pachinko gaming machine PY5 will explain the game state to be newly shifted with the end of the jackpot game, and the termination conditions related to each game state. In the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the stop display of the jackpot symbols, the game state to be newly shifted with the end of the jackpot game and the end condition for each game state are the special It is associated with the type of pattern. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area 16 (V winning), the game state to be newly shifted with the end of the jackpot game, and the end conditions related to each game state , is associated with the type of the special symbol.

FIG. 100 shows a special symbol type (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the big hit game, a game state that shifts with the end of the big hit game corresponding to the special symbol type, and an end condition related to the game state. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game state setting table showing the relationship of.

As shown in Figure 100, when the type of the special symbol is the jackpot pattern A and the small hit pattern A, with the end of the jackpot game (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) corresponding to the special pattern type , Shift to a time saving state (low probability high base game state). End conditions are set in this time saving state. In the case of the big hit pattern A and the small hit pattern A, the special figure 2 variable display is executed once. Therefore, the second big winning port 15 is a time saving state that shifts with the end of the big winning game executed after the big winning pattern A is stopped and displayed, and a small winning game that is executed after the small winning pattern A is stopped and displayed. The time-saving state that shifts with the end of the jackpot game executed after the winning game ball passes through the specific area 16 is until the special figure 2 variable display is executed once without the jackpot game being executed. It is possible to continue. That is, the specified number of times of the time saving state (time saving specified number of times) that is shifted with the end of the big winning game executed by the stop display of the big winning pattern A, and the small winning game executed by the stopping display of the small winning pattern A The specified number of times of the time saving state (time saving specified number of times) to be shifted with the end of the jackpot game executed by the passing of the game ball that has won the second prize winning opening 15 through the specific area 16 is one time.

And, although detailed description is omitted, when the special figure 2 variable display related to the loss is executed once in the time saving state related to the big hit pattern A and the small hit pattern A, at the end of the special figure 2 variable display Accordingly, it shifts from the time saving state to the normal game state. However, as mentioned above, the probability of being determined as a small hit in the second big hit determination is 1/1.2, so the stop display of the small hit pattern is performed in the special figure 2 variable display in the time saving state, and there It is expected that a cycle in which a V prize is won, a third jackpot game is executed, and a transition to a time-saving state occurs in accordance with the end of the third jackpot game is performed continuously to some extent. In other words, it is expected that Renso will be able to continue to some extent.

Also, when the special symbol type is the jackpot symbol B, the normal game state (low-probability low-base game state) is entered with the end of the jackpot game (second jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type. And, no end condition is set in this normal game state.

Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern related to the time saving state in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in the time saving state is the special figure 2 variation pattern in the time saving state described in the basic embodiment It is different from the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for determining. FIG. 101 shows a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table) related to the time saving state in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101, the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated with the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the big hit determination result "small hit", and the big hit determination result "loss". There is a time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table.

In the case of a small hit, THP81 is determined with a probability of 90%, and THP82 is determined with a probability of 10%. In the case of losing, THP83 is determined with a probability of 100%.

Here, the flow (production flow) of the special figure variation production based on each special figure variation pattern will be described.

In the special figure fluctuation production based on the THP81, the special figure fluctuation production is executed immediately after the start of the special figure fluctuation production, and the special figure fluctuation production ends by the special production.

In the special figure fluctuation production based on the THP82, the special figure production is executed immediately after the start of the special figure fluctuation production, followed by the consecutive villa result production, and then the revival production is executed, and the special figure fluctuation is performed by the revival production. The performance ends.

In the special figure variation performance based on the THP83, the special figure variation presentation is executed immediately after the start of the special figure variation presentation, followed by the consecutive villa result presentation, and the special figure variation presentation ends by the consecutive villa result presentation.

In the fifth embodiment, various special figure variation patterns (THP81 to THP83) are named in the second item from the right of the configuration example of the special figure variation pattern determination table in FIG. 101 "name of special figure variation pattern" is attached. For example, basically, the special figure fluctuation pattern "THP81" of the small hit where the special figure fluctuation production ends in the special production is called "special normal small hit fluctuation", and basically the special figure fluctuation production ends in the revival production. The special figure fluctuation pattern "THP82" of the small hit is called "special resurrection small hit fluctuation", and basically the special figure fluctuation pattern "THP83" of the loss where the special figure fluctuation production ends with the result production of Renso is called "special It is called “losing change”.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, since the prescribed number of working hours is one time, when the first special figure 2 variable display in the working hours saving state is lost, the working hours saving state ends and the normal game state is entered. Therefore, the special performance is a performance that agitates whether it is a small hit (substantially, a big hit) or a loss, and it is a game state (continuous It is also an effect to incite whether the player can continue the game or whether it will be in a normal game state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the special effect, a background image dedicated to the special effect is displayed on the entire display section 50a in the same manner as in the SP reach, the L reach, and the like. Although the specific display contents of the background image dedicated to the special effect can be appropriately set, in the fifth embodiment, the background image dedicated to the special effect is composed of 3DCG moving images. A predetermined story is associated with the moving image that constitutes the background image dedicated to the special effect. In the video related to the background image dedicated to the special effect, as the predetermined story progresses, in the final phase, the effect that suggests a small win (substantially a big win) (big win suggestive effect) is executed or lost. A branching point (a so-called “hit-lose branching point”) at which the production (losing-suggestion production) is executed or not is reached.

In the special figure variation performance based on the THP81, after the win-lose branch point, after the big hit suggesting performance dedicated to the special performance is executed, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the big win is performed. On the other hand, in the special figure variation production based on THP83, after the winning branch point, a special production-only losing suggestion production is executed, and then a series of villas result production that suggests that the series of villas will end is executed. While returning to the normal effect mode, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a failure is performed.

In addition, although the positioning can be set as appropriate, the jackpot suggesting production in the special figure fluctuation production related to THP81 is included in the special production, and the losing suggestion production in the special figure fluctuation production related to THP83 is included in the special production. and

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation production based on THP82, as in the case of special loss fluctuation, special production (including loss suggestion production) and consecutive villa result production are executed, and then, once, while returning to the normal production mode , Temporary stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the form of showing a loss is performed, but from there, a resurrection performance is performed to inform that it was actually a small hit, and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the form of showing a big win are performed. A stop display is performed.

In addition, the production flow configuration of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern related to the time saving state The production time of the production can be set as appropriate, but in the fifth embodiment, the special production is started. is set to 7 seconds. The performance time of the jackpot suggestion performance is set to 13 seconds, the performance time of the losing suggestion performance is set to 3 seconds, the performance time of the consecutive villa result performance is set to 5 seconds, and the performance time of the resurrection performance is set to 18 seconds. , and the time from the Renso result effect to the revival effect is set to 2 seconds.

Here, the continuous villa result presentation will be described. Renso result production is a production that basically suggests that Renso will end, although it may be executed with a special resurrection jackpot fluctuation. In the consecutive villa result presentation, the total number of jackpots in the consecutive villa including the jackpot just before the consecutive villa starts (the number of jackpots in the consecutive villa), the jackpot game just before the consecutive villa starts (first jackpot game), And the sum of the number of game balls acquired by winning the first big prize hole 14 in the jackpot game (third jackpot game) in Renso (the number of game balls acquired in Renso) and the effect of the result of Renso are completed. The elapsed time of the previous residence is displayed.

Although detailed description is omitted, the effect control microcomputer 121 is configured to be able to appropriately measure the number of jackpots during consecutive games, and the number of winning game balls during consecutive games in addition to the elapsed time. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the special figure variation performance start command related to the special loss variation or the special figure variation performance start command related to the special revival jackpot variation to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. A command indicating the number of jackpots (number of game balls won during consecutive games command) and a command indicating the number of game balls obtained during consecutive games (game ball number obtained during consecutive games command) are also set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 . In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 can appropriately measure the timing at which the series result production starts. command) in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

Then, the special figure variation effect start command related to the special loss variation set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 or the special figure variation effect start command related to the special revival jackpot variation is sent to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004). , the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 waits 10 seconds from the start of the special figure variation effect related to the special loss variation or the special resurrection jackpot variation on the display unit 50a (7 Seconds + 3 seconds of failure suggestive effect) has elapsed, an image for the effect of the result of the consecutive villas (the effect image of the result of the consecutive villas) G91 is read out from the image ROM 142 and displayed in a large size around the center of the display section 50a. Here, the image CPU 141, based on the received command for the number of jackpots during consecutive games, the command for the number of game balls obtained during consecutive games, and the command for the number of game balls acquired during consecutive games, and the command for the elapsed time for consecutive games during consecutive games, displays the consecutive game results in the consecutive games result effect image G91. It displays the number of jackpots during the game, the number of game balls obtained during the game, and the elapsed time of the game immediately before the end of the result performance of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the effect time of the consecutive villa result effect is set to 5 seconds. Therefore, when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the multi-shomes result effect, the image CPU 141 erases the multi-shoe result effect image G91 to end the multi-shoe result effect, and displays the first normal background on the display unit 50a. The image G111 and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 which are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a failure are displayed. Here, if it is a special loss variation, the image CPU 141 completely (definitely 2) While the display is stopped, if the special resurrection jackpot variation is detected, the small win is actually shown on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. is started, and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stop-displayed in a manner indicating a big win at the timing when the special figure 2 stop display is finally performed.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY5, in addition to the special effect, the resurrection result effect, and the resurrection effect, etc., the special figure variable display in the normal game state results in a big win, and the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to execute a time presentation that continuously displays the time elapsed since the transition to the time saving state (specific time saving state) after (first jackpot game), in other words, the time that has elapsed since the start of the series. .

The time effect can be executed during the continuous villa, and can be positioned as a performance in which the elapsed time of the continuous villa is displayed in real time. It should be noted that the elapsed time of this series of villas corresponds to "the elapsed time of the series of villas" which is the object to be measured by the aforementioned series of villas elapsed time timer 128. FIG. However, as will be described later, the production control microcomputer 121 may interrupt the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive villas by the elapsed time timer 128 during the consecutive villas. Therefore, the time displayed by the time presentation may not accurately display the actual elapsed time of the Renso.

In 5th Embodiment, a time production|presentation is started at the timing which transfers to a specific time saving state. Therefore, for example, when the ending of the first jackpot game ends, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts measuring the elapsed time of the consecutive game by the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128, and commands (time production start command) is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for production. When the time effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 transmits the time effect from the image ROM 142. The image (time effect image) G90 for the purpose is read out and displayed around the lower left corner of the display section 50a to start the time effect. The time effect image G90 represents an eight-digit (00:00:00:00) stop witch capable of counting seconds, minutes, and hours to the second decimal place. After starting the time effect, the image CPU 141 appropriately updates the time represented by the time effect image G90 according to the passage of time.

Also, the time production ends when the special figure variable display related to the special loss variation ends and the normal game state is entered. In detail, the time production ends just before the consecutive villa result production is performed in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special loss fluctuation. When the CPU 141 for images receives the above-mentioned continuous-solo result rendering time-continuous-sso-elapsed time command, it erases (hides) the time effect image G90 and then displays the continuous-solo result effect image G91. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 sets the continuous residence elapsed time command at the time of the consecutive residence result production in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special loss fluctuation, it resets the consecutive residence elapsed time timer 128 to reduce the continuous residence elapsed time. End the measurement.

Next, interruption of the time presentation will be described. The interruption of the time production includes interruption of the time production by the first interruption mode, interruption of the time production by the second interruption mode, and interruption of the time production by the third interruption mode. The first interruption mode, the second interruption mode, and the third interruption mode differ in the event that causes the interruption. is effect content that the updating of the elapsed time of consecutive residences represented by the time effect image G90 is stopped, and the second suspension mode and the third suspension mode are effect contents that the time effect image G90 is temporarily hidden. is.

First, the suspension of the time presentation in the first suspension mode will be described. Interruption of the time production in the first interruption mode is performed due to the jackpot special production. The jackpot special effect is a effect for notifying the winning of a jackpot, and is executed in the time effect image G90. Specifically, when the time effect image G90 is updating the elapsed time, the time indicated by the timer is "00:00" as if the timer indicated by the time effect image G90 had failed. :00:00". Incidentally, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot special effect is started when one second has passed since the start of the special figure variation effect related to the special normal jackpot variation.

Also, the performance time of the big hit special performance is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, the time presentation interrupted by the first interruption mode is resumed when 10 seconds have passed since the interruption started. Then, the time presentation interrupted by the first interruption mode is resumed so that the interrupted time is corrected. That is, the consecutive elapsed time indicated by the time effect (time effect image G90) when interrupted by the first interrupt mode is different from the consecutive elapsed time indicated by the time effect (time effect image G90) when restarted. Specifically, the value obtained by subtracting the elapsed time represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when interrupted by the first interruption mode from the elapsed time represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when restarted. is the interrupted time.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the special figure variation pattern related to the special normal big winning variation, it performs a big winning special performance execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the big winning special performance. The big-hit special effect execution determination is executed using, for example, a big-hit special effect execution determination table stored in the performance ROM 123 . It is assumed that the jackpot special performance execution determination table is constructed so that the jackpot special performance is determined to be executed with a probability of 10%. Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the jackpot special performance in the jackpot special performance execution determination, the command indicating the start of the jackpot special performance (jackpot special performance) is issued along with the special figure variation performance start command related to the special normal jackpot variation. start command) is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

When the special figure variation production start command and the jackpot special production start command related to the special normal jackpot fluctuation set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 are transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004), image control is performed. The image CPU 141 of the substrate 140 changes the consecutive elapsed time represented by the time effect image G90 to "00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00: 00:00", the timer represented by the time effect image G90 is broken down (bugged), thereby executing a special jackpot effect.

While the jackpot special effect is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 121 continues to measure the consecutive elapsed time by the consecutive residence elapsed time timer 128.例文帳に追加Since the performance time of the big win special performance is set to 10 seconds, the performance control microcomputer 121 indicates the continuous residence elapsed time timer 128 when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the big win special performance. A command (first time presentation restart command) indicating the resumption of the time presentation including the elapsed time of consecutive residences is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for presentation.

When the first time effect restart command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the display unit 50a to: The consecutive elapsed time indicated by the time effect image G90 is changed to the consecutive elapsed time indicated by the first time effect restart command, the display mode of the time effect image G90 is returned to the original normal mode, and the time effect is restarted.

Next, interruption of the time presentation in the second interruption mode will be described. Interruption of the time presentation by the second interruption mode is performed due to the stop of the shooting operation of the game ball. During a period other than the period during which the round game is performed, the time effect image G90 is hidden when the shooting operation of the game ball is stopped, specifically when the handle 72k is not touched. .

In addition, the time effect interrupted by the second interruption mode is restarted when the game ball shooting operation is considered to be restarted, more specifically, when the handle 72k is touched again. Strictly speaking, contacting the handle 72k again does not necessarily constitute a restart of the game ball shooting operation, but in the fifth embodiment, it is regarded as a restart of the game ball shooting operation. Then, the time presentation interrupted by the second interruption mode is restarted at the consecutive elapsed time when it was interrupted. That is, the consecutive elapsed time indicated by the time effect (time effect image G90) when interrupted by the second interruption mode is the same as the consecutive consecutive time elapsed indicated by the time effect (time effect image G90) when restarted. .

The performance control microcomputer 121 is a period other than the period from receiving the round number designation command indicating the first round game to receiving the ending command of the jackpot game, in other words, other than the period during which the round game is being executed. In the 1 ms timer interrupt process of step S4011 during the period of , whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF, that is, whether the handle 72k has changed from the state in which it was in contact to the state in which it is not in contact (game (whether or not the shooting operation of the ball has stopped) and whether or not the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON, that is, whether or not the handle 72k has changed from a non-contact state to a contact state. (Whether or not the shooting operation of the game ball has resumed) is determined.

Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 judges that the shooting operation of the game ball has stopped, if the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 is measuring the consecutive game elapsed time, the measurement is interrupted. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 temporarily stops the consecutive residence elapsed time timer 128 at the consecutive residence elapsed time at that time. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 121 stores a command (second interruption mode interruption command) indicating to interrupt the time production in the second interruption mode (hide the time production image G90) in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for production. set.

When the second interruption mode interruption command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the display unit 50a to: The time effect image G90 is hidden.

In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the shooting operation of the game ball has resumed, if the measurement of the consecutive elapsed time by the consecutive passage elapsed time timer 128 is temporarily stopped, the measurement is canceled, that is, resume. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 restarts the consecutive residence elapsed time timer 128 from the consecutive residence elapsed time at that time. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 restarts the display of the time effect image G90 including the elapsed time at that time, that is, the elapsed time at the time when the measurement of the elapsed time timer 128 was temporarily stopped. A command (second time effect restart command) is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

When the second time effect restart command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the display unit 50a to: The display of the time effect image G90 is resumed at the lapsed time indicated by the second time effect restart command, and the time effect in the time effect image G90 is resumed.

Next, interruption of the time presentation in the third interruption mode will be described. The suspension of the time presentation by the third suspension mode is performed due to the execution of the continuous game result presentation related to the special resurrection jackpot variation. The time performance image G90 is hidden from immediately before the start of the consecutive resort result performance to the start of the revival performance in the special figure variation performance related to the special revival big hit variation.

In addition, the time from the start of the consecutive resort result effect to the start of the resurrection effect is set to 7 seconds (5 seconds of the consecutive resort result effect+2 seconds of the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3). Therefore, the time presentation interrupted by the third interruption mode is resumed when 7 seconds have passed since the interruption started. Then, the time presentation interrupted by the third interruption mode is resumed so that the interrupted time is corrected. That is, the continuous elapsed time represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when interrupted by the third suspension mode is different from the continuous time elapsed represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when restarted. Specifically, the value obtained by subtracting the elapsed time represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when interrupted by the third interruption mode from the elapsed time represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when restarted. is the interrupted time.

Then, in the special figure variation effect related to the special resurrection big hit variation, the time effect image G90 is erased (not displayed) immediately before the continuous game result effect is started, as in the case of the special loss variation. However, in the case of the special loss change, the time effect image G90 is erased and the time effect ends as it is. G90 is displayed and the time presentation resumes. In other words, in the case of special resurrection jackpot variation, the time presentation was interrupted in a non-display mode.

As described above, the production control microcomputer 121, when 10 seconds (7 seconds up to the winning branch point + 3 seconds of the losing suggestion production) have passed since the start of the special figure fluctuation production related to the special revival jackpot fluctuation, At the time of consecutive game result production, the consecutive game elapsed time command is set in the output buffer of RAM 124 for production. However, when the production control microcomputer 121 sets the consecutive residence elapsed time command at the consecutive residence result production in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special resurrection jackpot fluctuation, the consecutive residence elapsed time timer 128 is not reset. Continue measuring elapsed time.

When the command for the elapsed time for consecutive game results during consecutive game set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for production is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the In the section 50a, the time effect image G90 is hidden.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 continues measuring the continuous residence elapsed time by the consecutive residence elapsed time timer 128 while the special figure fluctuation production related to the special restoration jackpot fluctuation is being executed. 17 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation production (7 seconds until the hit branch point + 3 seconds for the losing suggestion production + 5 seconds for the consecutive house result production + 2 seconds for the temporary stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3) When the time elapses, the output buffer of RAM 124 for effect shows a command (third time effect resume command) indicating to resume the display of the time effect image G90 including the time effect elapsed time indicated by the time elapsed time timer 128. set to

When the third time effect restart command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the display unit 50a to: The display of the time effect image G90 is resumed at the lapsed time indicated by the third time effect restart command, and the time effect in the time effect image G90 is resumed.

Next, specific examples of time effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 109. FIG. The specific example here assumes that the game progresses as follows. The specific example starts from the ending of the first jackpot game. And it will be in a time saving state according to the end of a 1st jackpot game. That is, Renso starts. In the time-saving state, a special figure variation effect related to special normal jackpot variation is executed. In this special figure fluctuation production, the time production is not interrupted, and the time production is performed normally. Then, the special figure 2 variable display related to the special normal big winning variation is finished, the small winning game is executed, V win is won, and the third big winning game is executed. When the third jackpot game ends, the time-saving state is entered, and in the time-saving state, the special figure variation performance relating to the special normal jackpot variation is executed again. In this special figure variation production, the time production is interrupted by the jackpot special production (the time production is interrupted in the first interruption mode). Then, the special figure 2 variable display related to the special normal big winning variation is finished, the small winning game is executed, V win is won, and the third big winning game is executed. When the third jackpot game ends, a time-saving state is entered, and in the time-saving state, a special figure variation performance relating to the special revival jackpot variation is executed. In this special figure fluctuation production, for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the special figure fluctuation production started, the output (contact detection signal) from the touch switch 72a turns off from ON, and 3 seconds have passed since then. When this is done, the output (contact detection signal) from the touch switch 72a is changed from OFF to ON. That is, the shooting operation of the game ball is stopped for 3 seconds after 2 seconds have passed since the start of the special figure fluctuation effect. As a result, while the shooting operation of the game ball is stopped, the time production is interrupted by non-display (the time production is interrupted in the second interruption mode). In addition, since it is a special resurrection jackpot variation, the time performance is interrupted by non-display during the period from the start of the resurrection result performance to the start of the resurrection performance (the time performance is interrupted in the third suspension mode). . Then, the special figure 2 variable display related to the special resurrection big winning variation is finished, the small winning game is executed, the player wins V, and the third big winning game is executed. When the third jackpot game ends, the time-saving state is entered, and in the time-saving state, a special figure variation effect relating to special loss variation is executed. When the special figure 2 variable display related to the special loss variation is executed, the normal game state is entered, and the continuous game ends. In addition, in this special figure variation production, the time production ends when the consecutive villa result production is executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), from the situation in which the ending of the first jackpot game is performed, when the ending ends, it shifts to a time saving state, but when it shifts to a time saving state, FIG. 102 (B) , the display unit 50a displays a background image for a special effect, and also displays the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are stop-displayed in a manner indicating a big win related to the first big win game. Then, at the timing when the first jackpot game executed based on the special figure variable display in the normal game state ends and shifts to the time saving state, in other words, the time effect image G90 is displayed on the display unit at the timing when the consecutive villas start. It is displayed in 50a and the time production starts. As soon as the time effect image G90 is displayed, the update of the consecutive residence elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 starts.

And, for example, as shown in FIG. 102(C), it is assumed that the special figure 2 variable display is started by winning the second starting port 12 when 4 seconds have passed after shifting to the time saving state. In addition, as explained in the above-mentioned specific example here, the special figure 2 variation pattern related to the first special figure 2 variable display in this series is a special normal jackpot variation. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102(C) to 102(E), the display unit 50a stops displaying the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner that the special effect progresses and finally shows a big win. And, since it is assumed that the time production is performed normally in this special figure 2 variable display, during this period, the continuous residence elapsed time displayed in the time production image G90 continues to be appropriately updated according to the passage of time.

Next, a small winning game is executed, a V prize is won in the small winning game, and a third big winning game is executed. is expanded to During this time, as shown in FIGS. 103(A) to 103(D), the consecutive residence elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be appropriately updated according to the passage of time.

When the third jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time saving state, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed in the time saving state, but the special figure 2 variation pattern related to the second special figure 2 variable display in this series is a special normal jackpot. Fluctuations. However, in the specific example here, in the special figure variation performance related to the special normal jackpot variation, the jackpot special performance is to be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 104(A) to 104(B) , the special figure variation effect related to the second special figure 2 variable display in Renso is started, and the time effect image G90 is displayed according to the passage of time. While the consecutive residence elapsed time displayed in , continues to be appropriately updated, when one second elapses after the start of the special figure variation performance, the big hit special performance is started. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 104(C), the consecutive elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 reaches "00:00:00:00" and the update is stopped, and the time effect image G90 is displayed. is changed from a normal mode to a special mode such that the timer representing the time effect image G90 is out of order.

Then, since the performance time of the special jackpot effect is 10 seconds, as shown in FIG. resume. Specifically, the display mode of the time effect image G90 returns to the normal mode, and the consecutive elapsed time is updated. Here, while the updating of the consecutive residence elapsed time in the time effect image G90 by the special jackpot effect is stopped, the measurement of the consecutive passage elapsed time by the consecutive residence elapsed time timer 128 of the effect control microcomputer 121 is continued. Therefore, when the time effect is restarted, the continuous elapsed time represented by the time effect image G90 is corrected (corrected) to the actual (regular) continuous elapsed time, and then the updating is resumed. In other words, the time during which the update was stopped is added to the elapsed time represented by the time effect image G90.

Note that while the update of the consecutive elapsed time in the time effect image G90 by the big win special effect is stopped, the special effect progresses on the display section 50a in the same manner as when the stop is not performed. After the time production resumes, as shown in FIGS. 104(E) to 104(F), in the display section 50a, the special production progresses, and the production patterns EZ1 to EZ1 to finally indicate the jackpot. EZ3 is stopped and displayed, but during this time the elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be appropriately updated as time elapses.

After the situation shown in FIG. 104 (F), a small winning game is executed, a V prize is won in the small winning game, and a third big winning game is executed, but in the display unit 50a, the small winning game and the third An effect corresponding to the three big win games is developed. During this time, as shown in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G), the consecutive residence elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be appropriately updated according to the passage of time. In fact, it is assumed that during the round game, there is a period of time during which the player releases the handle 72k and the shooting operation of the game ball is stopped. However, as described above, the output state from the touch switch 72a is changed from ON to OFF, and the time effect is interrupted. 128 is interrupted during a period other than the period during which the round game is being played. Even in a time zone in which the output state from the switch 72a is changed from ON to OFF and the shooting of the game ball is not stopped, the consecutive elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be appropriately updated according to the passage of time. .

When the second third jackpot game in Renso ends, the state shifts to the time saving state, and the special figure 2 variable display in the time saving state is performed, but the special figure 2 related to the third special figure 2 variable display in this Renso. The variation pattern is assumed to be a special resurrection jackpot variation. Furthermore, in the specific example here, the output from the touch switch 72a turns from ON to OFF when 2 seconds have passed since the special figure variation effect related to the special normal jackpot variation started, and 3 seconds have passed since then. It is assumed that the output from the touch switch 72a is changed from OFF to ON when the touch switch 72a is pressed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(B), the special figure variation effect related to the third special figure 2 variable display in the renso is started, and the time effect image G90 is displayed according to the passage of time. 106(C), a time effect image G90 is hidden and the time presentation is interrupted. In addition, while the output from the touch switch 72a is OFF, the measurement of the consecutive residence elapsed time by the consecutive residence elapsed time timer 128 of the effect control microcomputer 121 is interrupted.

Then, when three seconds have passed since the output from the touch switch 72a was turned OFF, the output from the touch switch 72a is changed from OFF to ON. It is displayed and the time production resumes. However, in this case, since the measurement of the consecutive residence elapsed time by the consecutive residence elapsed time timer 128 of the production control microcomputer 121 was also interrupted, when the time production resumes, the consecutive residence elapsed time represented by the time production image G90 will be reached. On the other hand, it is resumed at the continuous elapsed time when the time effect image G90 is hidden.

After restarting the time effect, as shown in FIGS. 106(E) to 107(A), the special effect progresses on the display section 50a. The elapsed time displayed in the Renso continues to be updated as appropriate. However, since the special figure variation effect related to the special resurrection jackpot variation is being executed, when 10 seconds have passed since the special figure variation effect was started, the time effect image G90 is displayed as non-existent as shown in FIG. 107(B). While the time effect is interrupted by being displayed, the consecutive villa result effect image G91 is displayed in the center of the display section 50a, and the consecutive villa result effect is executed.

Then, in the special figure variation effect related to the special revival jackpot variation, when the consecutive game result effect ends, the first normal background image G111 is displayed as in the case of the special loss variation, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss are displayed. At this time as well, the time effect image G90 is hidden and the time effect is interrupted.

When two seconds have passed since the end of the consecutive game result effect, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a resurrection effect is executed to notify that it was actually a small win (substantially a big win). Then, when this revival presentation starts, the time presentation resumes. Specifically, the time effect image G90 is displayed, and the consecutive residence elapsed time in the time effect image G90 is updated. It should be noted that while the time effect image G90 by the multi-station result effect, etc., is not displayed, the multi-shoe elapsed time timer 128 of the effect control microcomputer 121 continues to measure the multi-shoe elapsed time, so the time effect is not displayed. When resuming, the continuous elapsed time represented by the time effect image G90 is corrected (corrected) to the actual (regular) continuous elapsed time, and then update is resumed. In other words, it is as if the time during which the update was hidden was added to the elapsed time represented by the time effect image G90.

Then, after the time production resumes, as shown in FIGS. 107(D) to 107(E), in the display section 50a, the resurrection production progresses, and the production patterns EZ1 to EZ1 to finally show the jackpot are displayed. EZ3 is stopped and displayed, but during this time the elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be appropriately updated as time elapses.

After the situation shown in FIG. 107 (E), a small winning game is executed, a V prize is won in the small winning game, and a third big winning game is executed. An effect corresponding to the three big win games is developed. During this time, as shown in FIGS. 108(A) to 108(D), the consecutive residence elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be appropriately updated according to the passage of time.

When the third jackpot game for the third time in Renso ends, the state shifts to the time saving state, and the special figure 2 variable display in the time saving state is performed, but the special figure 2 related to the fourth special figure 2 variable display in this Renso. The variation pattern is assumed to be a special loss variation. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 109 (A) to 109 (B), from the start of the special figure variation production related to the fourth special figure 2 variable display in the renso until the renso result production is executed , the elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be appropriately updated as time elapses. Then, when 10 seconds have passed since the special figure fluctuation effect was started, as shown in FIG. A consecutive villa result effect image G91 is displayed and a consecutive villa result effect is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109(D), the first normal background image G111 is displayed, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating failure are displayed, and FIG. 109(E ), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed as they are, and the game is shifted to the normal game state, and the continuous game ends. Then, in accordance with the end of the consecutive games, for example, as shown in FIG. 109(E), a left-handed hitting image G93 is displayed to notify of left-handed hitting according to the normal game state.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY5, the effect control microcomputer 121 (effect execution means) that executes the effect is the time for measuring the continuous game elapsed time of the continuous game (specific game state advantageous to the player). It is possible to execute the production, and if a specific condition is met during the execution of the time production, the measurement of the elapsed time of the series of villas may be interrupted. The performance effect of the game is enhanced and the amusement of the game is improved. In addition, since the specific conditions for interrupting the measurement of the elapsed time of consecutive games include the fact that the game ball is not fired, the elapsed time of consecutive games reflects the playing time of the player more accurately. Therefore, the performance effect of the time performance is further enhanced, and the amusement of the game is improved. Furthermore, when a specific condition is established during execution of the time presentation in the jackpot game state (a special game state in which game balls are easily entered into the big winning openings 14 and 15), the measurement of the consecutive elapsed time is not interrupted. Since the elapsed time of consecutive games reflects the game time of the player more accurately, the performance effect of the time presentation is enhanced and the interest in the game is improved.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY5, the effect control microcomputer 121 (effect executing means for executing the effect) measures the elapsed time of the continuous game (specific game state advantageous to the player), and A time effect can be executed in which the numerical values of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) are updated and displayed on the display unit 50a according to the time, and the updating of the numerical values of the numerical image is interrupted during execution of the time effect. Since the game player can be made to pay attention to the time effect image G90, the effect of the time effect increases and the interest in the game is improved. Further, as suspension of updating of the numerical values of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) in the time effect, stopping updating of the numerical values of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image), ) is hidden, and the effect of the time presentation is further enhanced to improve the amusement of the game. Furthermore, when the jackpot special effect is executed during execution of the time effect (when the first condition is satisfied), updating of the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is stopped, while the game ball is stopped, or when the Renso result effect is executed (when the second condition is satisfied), the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is hidden. Since the suspension of the updating of the numerical values of the image is well defined, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the rendering effect of the time rendering.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY5, the effect control microcomputer 121 (effect executing means for executing the effect) measures the continuous game elapsed time of the continuous game (specific game state advantageous to the player), According to the elapsed time, it is possible to execute a time effect in which the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is updated and displayed on the display unit 50a, and the elapsed time is measured during execution of the time effect. Since the update of the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) may be interrupted without interrupting the time effect, the player can be surprised when the time effect is resumed. The effect is enhanced and the amusement of the game is improved. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 (effect executing means for executing the effect) updates the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) without interrupting the measurement of the elapsed time during the execution of the time effect. is interrupted, and there are times when the measurement of the elapsed time of consecutive villas is interrupted and updating of the numerical values of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is also interrupted. , it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect of time production. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 (effect executing means for executing the effect), during execution of the time effect, when the jackpot special effect is executed (when the first condition is satisfied), While interrupting the update of the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) without interrupting the measurement, when the shooting operation of the game ball is stopped (when the second condition is satisfied), Since the measurement of the time is interrupted and the update of the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is also interrupted, the elapsed time reflects the game time of the player more accurately. The performance effect of the time performance is heightened and the amusement of the game is improved.

(Modified example of the fifth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

The update of the consecutive residence elapsed time in the time production starts at the time of transition to the time saving state, but this start timing is not particularly limited, for example, at the start of the jackpot game before the time saving state or in the time saving state It may be changed as appropriate, such as at the start of the special figure 2 variable display.

Although the time performance is interrupted by the jackpot special performance, the suspension of the time performance may be executed with the same performance contents in the special figure fluctuation performance relating to the loss. That is, as an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of entering the jackpot gaming state, in other words, as an effect that increases the chances of shifting to the jackpot gaming state when executed, the consecutive elapsed time in the time effect image G90 is updated. may be stopped. In this case, the longer the stop time, the higher the possibility of entering the jackpot gaming state.

Alternatively, from the viewpoint of the so-called "ball output performance" and the game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game, there are jackpot games that are relatively advantageous to the player and jackpot games that are relatively disadvantageous to the player. In an advantageous jackpot game, the player may be notified that the game is an advantageous jackpot game by interrupting the time presentation like a jackpot special presentation with a predetermined probability. Alternatively, in both the jackpot game advantageous to the player and the jackpot game unfavorable to the player, the time production may be interrupted like the jackpot special production. It may be made to be a chance up for what is being executed.

Further, as the stopping of the update of the consecutive elapsed time in the time effect image G90 related to the big win special effect, the update may be stopped at the consecutive time elapsed when the big win special effect is started. Alternatively, as a jackpot special effect, the time effect image G90 may be hidden.

Furthermore, when the time effect interrupted by the big hit special effect is resumed, it is resumed at the consecutive elapsed time at the start of the interruption, as in the case of stopping the shooting of the game ball (the output from the touch switch 72a is changed from ON to OFF). You may make it That is, while the jackpot special effect is being executed, the measurement of the consecutive game elapsed time by the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 of the effect control microcomputer 121 may be interrupted.

The time effect image G90 is hidden as an interruption of the time effect when the output from the touch switch 72a changes from ON to OFF. , the effect content may be such that the running time displayed by the time effect image G90 is stopped as it was when it changed from ON to OFF. In this case, when the output from the touch switch 72a is changed from OFF to ON, updating may be restarted from the stopping elapsed time.

Furthermore, when the interrupted time performance is resumed by turning the output from the touch switch 72a from ON to OFF, it is restarted so that the suspended time is added as in the case of the special jackpot performance. may In other words, while the output from the touch switch 72a is OFF, the measurement of the consecutive residence elapsed time by the consecutive residence elapsed time timer 128 of the effect control microcomputer 121 may be continued.

The time effect image G90 is hidden as an interruption of the time effect when the consecutive hotel result effect is executed. It is also possible to set the performance content such that the elapsed time of the consecutive resorts represented by is stopped at the start of the continuous resort result performance. In this case, the time effect image G90 may be similarly displayed while the consecutive game result effect is being executed even when the time effect ends in the special losing variation. Then, for example, the time effect image G90 may be erased when the special figure 2 stop display indicating the failure is performed, and the time effect may end. Alternatively, in the case of the special losing variation, the time performance may be terminated at the timing when the continuous-street result performance is completed, and in the case of the special revival big hit variation, the time-based performance may be continued even after the continuous-street result performance is terminated. In addition, when the time effect image G90 is displayed while the consecutive-shelter result effect is being executed, the display contents of the consecutive-soul result effect may not include the elapsed time of the consecutive-shoe result effect.

In addition, the time production interrupted by the series result production will be resumed when the resurrection production starts, but the timing of this restart is not particularly limited. You can change it.

Furthermore, when the time effect interrupted by the continuous game result effect is resumed, the game ball discharge stop (the output from the touch switch 72a is changed from ON to OFF), the continuous game elapsed time at the start of the interruption is used. It may be restarted. That is, while the multi-station result effect is being executed, the measurement of the multi-station elapsed time by the multi-station elapsed time timer 128 of the effect control microcomputer 121 may be interrupted.

The fact that the output from the touch switch 72a is turned off is regarded as the stoppage of shooting the game ball, but the method for detecting the stoppage of shooting the game ball is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. . For example, when the output of the knob 72b of the shooting volume becomes "0", the shooting of the game ball is stopped, and the time presentation may be interrupted. Alternatively, a sensor capable of detecting a game ball may be provided in the shooting area 7, and when the sensor does not detect the game ball for a predetermined time, the shooting of the game ball is stopped, and the time presentation may be interrupted.

It is determined whether or not the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF, and whether or not the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON during a period other than the period during which the round game is being played. However, this period is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, whether or not the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF, and whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON during a period other than the entire jackpot game including the opening, round game, and ending. , may be determined. Alternatively, it is determined whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF and whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON in a period other than the small winning game and the big winning game. You may do so.

Although the effect control board 120 measures the continuous running elapsed time, the image control board 140 may measure the continuous running elapsed time.

Type of special figure 2 variation pattern in time saving state, time related to special figure 2 variation pattern in time saving state, probability of winning a small hit, upper limit of number of special figures 2 reserved, type of jackpot, component of jackpot game, end of jackpot game The type of game state to be shifted according to is not particularly limited, and may be changed as appropriate.

The continuous game ends by executing the special figure 2 variable display related to the loss in the time saving state and moving to the normal game state as it is, but the ending timing of the continuous game may be changed as appropriate. For example, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot in the second jackpot determination, there are times when it shifts to a time saving state and times when it shifts to a normal game state, and when it shifts to the normal game state, the continuous game is ended. You can do it. In this case, in the round game, it is possible to execute an effect that encourages the continuation or end of the continuous game like a special effect, and for example, in the last round game, the continuous game is continued in the case of shifting to a time-saving state. On the other hand, when shifting to the normal game state, an effect suggesting that the consecutive game will end may be executed, and the consecutive game result effect may be executed at the ending. However, even in such a case, when shifting to the time-saving state, in the last round game, an effect suggesting that the consecutive villas will end is executed, and in the ending, the consecutive villas result effect is executed, Finally, a resurrection effect may be executed.

7. Other Modification Examples Next, other modification examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment to the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment are described below. explain. Hereinafter, the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment to the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment are referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY, etc.".

In the pachinko game machine PY or the like, the display unit 50a is used to variably display the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in order to notify the result of the special drawing lottery. (Slot machine)”, a special figure lottery result may be notified by arranging a drum on which a pattern is displayed and by variably displaying the drum.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY, etc., the big winning opening 14 can be opened in the big winning game, but a winning area that can be opened in the big winning game may be provided in addition to the big winning opening 14 .

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY, etc., when a specific jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always progresses in a high-probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting conditions for the high-probability state may be changed. For example, in addition to the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device that can be opened and closed and into which game balls can enter when opened is provided at a position where the game balls can reach in the game area 6, and a second big winning device is provided at a position where the game balls can reach. In a predetermined round game, when the game ball that has entered the second big winning device by opening the second big winning device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side thereof, a high probability state occurs with the end of the big winning game. may be set.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second big winning device opens for an easy time (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the second big winning device A non-specific jackpot pattern (a jackpot pattern that makes it difficult to set a high probability state) that opens for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. In addition, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the winning game balls can pass, and a distribution device for distributing the game balls to the specific area and the non-specific area is provided. Although the opening time of the second big prize device is the same, the combination of the opening mode of the second big prize device and the operation mode of the sorting device makes it easy to set the high probability state and the high probability state. It is also possible to provide a jackpot pattern that is difficult to set.

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY or the like, the game control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (game control). As shown by 120, the control of the game and the control of the presentation are performed by different substrates, but they may be configured to be performed by one substrate. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

In addition, the game machine of the present invention can be applied to other pinball game machines such as arrange ball machines and mammoth ball game machines, reel-type game machines (so-called "slot machines"), and the like.

8. Inventions Disclosed in the Aforedescribed Embodiments The following Inventions A to G are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]. In the description of inventions A to G, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiments of the invention described above and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as the means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for the following inventions A1 to A3, Invention B is a generic term for the following inventions B1 to B3, Invention C is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C3, and Invention D is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C3. , the following inventions D1 to D3, invention E is the following inventions E1 to E3, invention F is the following inventions F1 to F3, and invention G is the following invention G1 It is a general term for ~G3.

In addition, according to the invention A, the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2022-059249 has an effect of improving amusement in the game with respect to the problem 1 described below. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2022-059249, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball entering a starting hole is established, a variable display of special symbols is executed. After the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the stop display of the special symbols is performed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stop-displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. Then, a specific performance suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming an advantageous game state may be executed, and further, before the specific performance is executed, an indication performance suggesting that the specific performance will be executed is executed. Sometimes. However, for a game machine capable of executing a premonition effect suggesting that a specific effect will be executed before executing a specific effect suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming an advantageous game state, improvement of game interest is attempted. Therefore, there is still room for improvement. Therefore, the first task is to provide a new gaming machine that enhances amusement in games.

Further, according to Invention B, Invention E, Invention F, and Invention G, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2022-059249 has the effect of improving amusement with respect to Problem 2 described below. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2022-059249, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball entering a starting hole is established, a variable display of special symbols is executed. After the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the stop display of the special symbols is performed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stop-displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. Then, the specific image may be displayed on the display unit. However, gaming machines capable of displaying specific images on the display section still have room for improvement in order to improve the enjoyment of games. Therefore, the second task is to provide a novel gaming machine that enhances amusement in games.

Furthermore, according to the invention C, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-181255 has an effect of improving amusement in a game with respect to the problem 3 described below. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-181255, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball entering a starting hole is satisfied, a variable display of special symbols is executed. After the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the stop display of the special symbols is performed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stop-displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. Then, a specific performance suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming an advantageous game state may be executed, and a plurality of unit performances are continuously executed in the specific performance. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve game interest in gaming machines capable of executing a specific effect in which a plurality of unit effects are continuously executed. Therefore, the third task is to provide a novel gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the invention D, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2022-059249 has an effect of improving amusement in a game with respect to the problem 4 described below. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2022-059249, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball entering a starting hole is established, a variable display of special symbols is executed. After the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the stop display of the special symbols is performed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stop-displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. Various effects are executed during the game, and specifications can be changed for specific matters regarding the effects. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the enjoyment of games with respect to gaming machines that can change the specifications of specific matters related to presentation. Therefore, the fourth task is to provide a novel gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The game machine according to invention A1 is
A game executing means (game control board 100) that may bring about an advantageous game state (jackpot game state, high-probability state, time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player;
Effect execution means (effect control board 120, image control board 140) capable of executing effects,
The production executing means is
A specific effect (supervisor effect) may be executed that suggests that the advantageous gaming state may occur,
Before executing the specific effect, a precursor effect (predictive effect) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed may be executed,
The game machine is characterized in that, when the specified performance is not executed after the precursor performance is executed, the possibility of the advantageous game state being achieved is higher than the possibility of the advantageous game state not being achieved.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to Invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A1,
The game machine is characterized in that the specific effects include a first specific effect (first specific effect) and a second specific effect (second specific effect) having a different effect mode from the first specific effect.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A2,
The foreshadowing effect may suggest that the first specific effect will be executed or that the second specific effect will be executed. A game machine characterized by being executed.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The game machine according to invention B1 is
A game executing means (game control board 100) that may bring about an advantageous game state (jackpot game state, high-probability state, time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player;
Effect execution means (effect control board 120, image control board 140) capable of executing effects,
The production executing means is
When the specific image (holding icon, the icon) is displayed at the first display position (first special position) on the display unit, and when the specific image is displayed at the second display position (second special position), there is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the possibility of the advantageous game state is higher when the specific image is displayed at the second display position than when the specific image is displayed at the first display position. .

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
As the display position of the specific image, there is a normal normal display position (normal position),
When the specific image is displayed at the normal display position and moves to the first display position, and when the specific image is displayed at the normal display position and moves to the second display position. and a game machine.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2,
The game executing means can execute a determination (jackpot determination) as to whether or not to set the advantageous game state, and when it is determined to set the advantageous game state in the determination, the advantageous game state may be set,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific image is an image that may be displayed at the normal display position in response to the occurrence of the right to execute the determination (special figure 1 reservation).

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to invention C1 is
A game executing means (game control board 100) that may bring about an advantageous game state (jackpot game state, high-probability state, time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player;
Effect execution means (effect control board 120, image control board 140) capable of executing effects,
The production executing means is
A specific effect (special mode effect) that suggests that there is a possibility that the advantageous gaming state may be executed,
In the specific effect, a plurality of types of unit effects (cut-in effect, cross-group effect, frame lamp flash) can be executed N times (three times) continuously, and the same type of unit effect is N-1 times. A game machine characterized in that the possibility of the advantageous game state is higher when the game is executed N times than when it is executed.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The game machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The unit effects include a first unit effect (cut-in effect) and a second unit effect (cross-group effect),
Only one of the first unit effect and the second unit effect is performed alone in the specific effect than when both the first unit effect and the second unit effect are mixed and executed in the specific effect. A game machine characterized in that the possibility of the advantageous game state is higher when the game is executed in .

8-3-3. Invention C3
The game machine according to invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The unit effects include a first unit effect (cut-in effect) and a second unit effect,
The advantageous game state is more likely to occur when the second unit performance (cross-group performance) is executed N times in the specific performance than when the first unit performance is executed N times in the specific performance. A game machine characterized by high flexibility.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to invention D1 is
Equipped with production execution means (production control board 120) capable of executing production,
As the specifications of the specific items related to the production (the first specific product to the fifth specific product), there are a default first specification (default state) and a second specification (customized state) different from the first specification,
When the specification of the specific item is set to the second specification, the effect execution means can execute a specific display (in-game custom operation image G80) inquiring about continuation of the setting of the second specification on the display unit. A game machine characterized by being.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
A variable display of identification information (special figure) can be executed in the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a prize to the first start port 11 and the second start port 12), and a specific result (jackpot pattern) is displayed by the variable display of the identification information. It further comprises a game execution means (game control board 100) that may execute a specific game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when derived,
The effect executing means variably displays the identification information, and when the predetermined condition is established in a non-game state (customer waiting state) in which the specific game is not executed and the variably display of the identification information is executed. , a game machine characterized in that the specific display may be executed.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D2,
Furthermore, an operation means (cross button 40k, first effect button 41k) that can be operated by the player is provided,
In the non-game state, the specification of the specific item can be changed from the first specification to the second specification by operating the operation means,
When the specification of the specific item is changed from the first specification to the second specification in the non-gaming state, the specification is changed in the variable display of the identification information executed with the predetermined condition being satisfied in the non-gaming state. A game characterized in that the display is not executed, and the specific display may be executed in the variable display of the identification information executed after the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-game state that occurs next. machine.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to invention E1 is
A game control means (game control board 100) capable of making a specific game state (continuous game state) advantageous to the player;
Effect execution means (effect control board 120, image control board 140) for executing effects using effect means including predetermined display means (display unit 50a),
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a time effect (time effect) for measuring the elapsed time of the specific game state,
The game machine is characterized in that the measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted when a specific condition is met during execution of the time presentation.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The game machine according to invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
Furthermore, an operation means (handle 72k) that allows the player to perform a game ball shooting operation,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific condition is that the shooting operation is not performed.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to invention E2,
It further comprises a winning opening (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15) into which game balls can enter,
The specific game state includes a special game state (jackpot game state) in which game balls enter the winning hole easily,
The game machine is characterized in that the effect executing means does not interrupt the measurement of the elapsed time when the specific condition is established during execution of the time effect in the special game state.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to invention F1 is
A game control means (game control board 100) capable of making a specific game state (continuous game state) advantageous to the player;
Effect execution means (effect control board 120, image control board 140) for executing effects using effect means including predetermined display means (display unit 50a),
The production executing means is
Along with measuring the elapsed time of the specific game state, it is possible to execute a time effect (time effect) that updates the numerical value of a predetermined numerical image (time effect image G90) according to the elapsed time and displays it on the display means. and
The gaming machine is characterized in that updating of the numerical values of the numerical image may be interrupted during execution of the time presentation.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The game machine according to invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
The game machine is characterized in that the effect executing means has a time to stop updating the numerical values of the numerical image and a time to hide the numerical image during execution of the timed effect.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to invention F2,
The effect executing means stops updating the numerical value of the numerical image when a first condition (execution of a special jackpot effect) is established during the execution of the time effect, while the second condition (game ball A gaming machine characterized in that the numerical image is hidden when a condition (stop of shooting, execution of consecutive game result presentation) is established.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The game machine according to invention G1 is
A game control means (game control board 100) capable of making a specific game state (continuous game state) advantageous to the player;
Effect execution means (effect control board 120, image control board 140) for executing effects using effect means including predetermined display means (display unit 50a),
The production executing means is
Along with measuring the elapsed time of the specific game state, it is possible to execute a time effect (time effect) that updates the numerical value of a predetermined numerical image (time effect image G90) according to the elapsed time and displays it on the display means. and
The gaming machine is characterized in that updating of the numerical values of the numerical image may be interrupted without interrupting measurement of the elapsed time during execution of the time presentation.

8-7-2. Invention G2
The gaming machine according to invention G2 is
A gaming machine according to invention G1,
During execution of the time effect, the effect execution means suspends updating of the numerical values of the numerical image without suspending measurement of the elapsed time, and suspends measurement of the elapsed time and changes the value of the numerical image. A game machine characterized by having a time to interrupt updating of numerical values.

8-7-3. Invention G3
The game machine according to invention G3 is
A gaming machine according to invention G2,
The effect executing means, when a first condition (execution of a special jackpot effect, execution of a consecutive villa result effect) is established during execution of the time effect, determines the numerical value without interrupting the measurement of the elapsed time. While the updating of the numerical values of the image is interrupted, when the second condition (stop of shooting the game ball) is satisfied, the measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted and the update of the numerical values of the numerical image is interrupted. game machine.

PY, PY1, PY2, PY3, PY4, PY5 Pachinko machine 1 Game board 6 Game area 6A Left game area 6B Right game area 11 First starting port 11a First starting port sensor 12 Second Start opening 12a Second start opening sensor 14 Big winning opening 14a Big winning opening sensor 40 Cross button device 40k Cross button 40ku Upper operation unit 40kd Lower operation unit 40kl Left operation unit 40kr Right operation unit 41 1st effect button device 41k 1st effect button 50 Image display device 50a Display unit 52 Speaker 53 Frame lamp 72k Handle 72a Touch switch 100 Game control board 101 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control Substrate 128 --- Production specific item storage unit, Renso elapsed time timer 121 --- Production control microcomputer 140 --- Image control board

Claims (3)

a game execution means that may bring the game into an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player;
and a production execution means capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
A specific effect may be executed that suggests that the advantageous gaming state may occur,
In the specific effect, a plurality of types of unit effects can be executed continuously N times, and the case where the same type of unit effects is executed N-1 times is better than the case where it is executed N times. A game machine characterized by a high possibility of becoming an advantageous game state. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The unit effects include a first unit effect and a second unit effect,
Only one of the first unit effect and the second unit effect is performed alone in the specific effect than when both the first unit effect and the second unit effect are mixed and executed in the specific effect. A game machine characterized in that the possibility of the advantageous game state is higher when the game is executed in . The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The unit effects include a first unit effect and a second unit effect,
The possibility of the advantageous gaming state is higher when the second unit performance is executed N times in the specific performance than when the first unit performance is executed N times in the specific performance. Characteristic game machine.

Images